Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in config
      1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
      2 %
      3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
      4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
      5 %
      6 \def\texinfoversion{2002-03-26.08}
      7 %
      8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
      9 %               2000, 01, 02 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     10 %
     11 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
     12 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
     13 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
     14 % your option) any later version.
     15 %
     16 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
     17 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
     18 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
     19 % General Public License for more details.
     20 %
     21 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     22 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
     23 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
     24 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
     25 %
     26 % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
     27 % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
     28 % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
     29 %
     30 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
     31 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
     32 %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
     33 %     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
     34 %   ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
     35 %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
     36 %     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
     37 %   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
     38 % 
     39 % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
     40 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
     41 % 
     42 % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
     43 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
     44 %
     45 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo (a] gnu.org.  Please include including a
     46 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
     47 % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
     48 %
     49 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
     50 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
     51 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
     52 %   tex foo.texi
     53 %   texindex foo.??
     54 %   tex foo.texi
     55 %   tex foo.texi
     56 %   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
     57 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
     58 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
     59 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
     60 %
     61 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
     62 % the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
     63 
     64 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
     65 
     66 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
     67 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
     68 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
     69 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
     70   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
     71 
     72 % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
     73 \let\ptexb=\b
     74 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
     75 \let\ptexc=\c
     76 \let\ptexcomma=\,
     77 \let\ptexdot=\.
     78 \let\ptexdots=\dots
     79 \let\ptexend=\end
     80 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
     81 \let\ptexexclam=\!
     82 \let\ptexi=\i
     83 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
     84 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
     85 \let\ptexstar=\*
     86 \let\ptext=\t
     87 
     88 % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
     89 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
     90 \let\+ = \relax
     91 
     92 \message{Basics,}
     93 \chardef\other=12
     94 
     95 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
     96 % starts a new line in the output.
     97 \newlinechar = `^^J
     98 
     99 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
    100 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
    101 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
    102 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
    103 \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
    104 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
    105 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
    106 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
    107 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
    108 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
    109 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
    110 \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
    111 \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
    112 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
    113 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
    114 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
    115 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
    116 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
    117 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
    118 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
    119 %
    120 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
    121 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
    122 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
    123 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
    124 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
    125 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
    126 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
    127 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
    128 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
    129 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
    130 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
    131 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
    132 %
    133 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
    134 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
    135 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
    136 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
    137 \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
    138 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
    139 \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
    140 
    141 % Ignore a token.
    142 %
    143 \def\gobble#1{}
    144 
    145 \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
    146 \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
    147 \hyphenation{eshell}
    148 \hyphenation{white-space}
    149 
    150 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
    151 \newdimen \bindingoffset
    152 \newdimen \normaloffset
    153 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
    154 
    155 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
    156 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
    157 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
    158 %
    159 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
    160 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
    161 \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
    162    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
    163    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
    164    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
    165 }%
    166 \else
    167 \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
    168    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
    169    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
    170    \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
    171    \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
    172    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
    173 }%
    174 \fi
    175 
    176 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
    177 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
    178 % 
    179 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
    180   \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
    181 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
    182   \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
    183 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
    184   \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
    185 
    186 % For @cropmarks command.
    187 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
    188 %
    189 \newif\ifcropmarks
    190 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
    191 %
    192 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
    193 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
    194 %
    195 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
    196 \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
    197 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
    198 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
    199 
    200 % Main output routine.
    201 \chardef\PAGE = 255
    202 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
    203 
    204 \newbox\headlinebox
    205 \newbox\footlinebox
    206 
    207 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
    208 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
    209 \def\onepageout#1{%
    210   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
    211   %
    212   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
    213   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
    214   %
    215   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
    216   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
    217   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
    218   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
    219   %
    220   {%
    221     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
    222     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
    223     % before the \shipout runs.
    224     %
    225     \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
    226     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
    227     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
    228                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
    229     \shipout\vbox{%
    230       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
    231       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
    232       %
    233       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
    234         \hsize = \outerhsize
    235         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
    236         \vtop to0pt{%
    237           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
    238           \nointerlineskip
    239           \line{%
    240             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
    241             \hfill
    242             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
    243           }%
    244           \vss}%
    245         \vskip\topandbottommargin
    246         \line\bgroup
    247           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
    248           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
    249           \vbox\bgroup
    250       \fi
    251       %
    252       \unvbox\headlinebox
    253       \pagebody{#1}%
    254       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
    255         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
    256         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
    257         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
    258         \vskip 2\baselineskip
    259         \unvbox\footlinebox
    260       \fi
    261       %
    262       \ifcropmarks
    263           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
    264         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
    265         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
    266         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
    267         \vbox to0pt{\vss
    268           \line{%
    269             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
    270             \hfill
    271             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
    272           }%
    273           \nointerlineskip
    274           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
    275         }%
    276       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
    277       \fi
    278     }% end of \shipout\vbox
    279   }% end of group with \turnoffactive
    280   \advancepageno
    281   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
    282 }
    283 
    284 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
    285 
    286 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
    287 {\catcode`\@ =11
    288 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
    289 % marginal hacks, juha (a] viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
    290 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
    291   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
    292 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
    293 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
    294 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
    295 }
    296 
    297 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
    298 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
    299 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
    300 %
    301 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
    302 \def\nstop{\vbox
    303   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
    304 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
    305 \def\nsbot{\vbox
    306   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
    307 
    308 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
    309 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
    310 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
    311 %
    312 \def\parsearg#1{%
    313   \let\next = #1%
    314   \begingroup
    315     \obeylines
    316     \futurelet\temp\parseargx
    317 }
    318 
    319 % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
    320 % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
    321 \def\parseargx{%
    322   % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
    323   \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
    324     \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
    325   \else
    326     \expandafter\parseargline
    327   \fi
    328 }
    329 
    330 % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
    331 {\obeyspaces %
    332  \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
    333 
    334 {\obeylines %
    335   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
    336     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
    337     %
    338     % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
    339     % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
    340     \argremovec #1\c\relax %
    341     \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
    342     %
    343     % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
    344     \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
    345   }%
    346 }
    347 
    348 % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
    349 % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
    350 % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
    351 % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
    352 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
    353 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
    354 
    355 % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
    356 %    @end itemize  @c foo
    357 % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
    358 % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
    359 % result to \toks0.
    360 %
    361 % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
    362 % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
    363 % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
    364 % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
    365 % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
    366 % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
    367 % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
    368 %
    369 \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
    370   \begingroup
    371     \ignoreactivespaces
    372     \edef\temp{#1}%
    373     \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
    374   \endgroup
    375 }
    376 
    377 % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
    378 %
    379 \begingroup
    380   \obeyspaces
    381   \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
    382 \endgroup
    383 
    384 
    385 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
    386 
    387 %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
    388 %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
    389 \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
    390 \def\ENVcheck{%
    391 \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
    392 \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
    393 
    394 % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
    395 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
    396 
    397 \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
    398 
    399 \def\beginxxx #1{%
    400 \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
    401 {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
    402 \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
    403 
    404 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
    405 %
    406 \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
    407 \def\endxxx #1{%
    408   \removeactivespaces{#1}%
    409   \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
    410   %
    411   \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
    412     \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
    413       % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
    414       \errhelp = \EMsimple
    415       \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
    416     \else
    417       \unmatchedenderror\endthing
    418     \fi
    419   \else
    420     % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
    421     \csname E\endthing\endcsname
    422   \fi
    423 }
    424 
    425 % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
    426 %
    427 \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
    428   \errhelp = \EMsimple
    429   \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
    430 }
    431 
    432 % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
    433 %
    434 \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
    435   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
    436 }
    437 
    438 
    439 % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
    440 % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
    441 \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
    442 \def\singlespace{%
    443   % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
    444   % environments.  --karl, 6may93
    445   %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
    446   %\kern \baselineskip}%
    447   \setleading\singlespaceskip
    448 }
    449 
    450 %% Simple single-character @ commands
    451 
    452 % @@ prints an @
    453 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
    454 \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
    455 
    456 % This is turned off because it was never documented
    457 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
    458 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
    459 %% but suppressing ligatures.
    460 %\def\`{{`}}
    461 %\def\'{{'}}
    462 
    463 % Used to generate quoted braces.
    464 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
    465 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
    466 \let\{=\mylbrace
    467 \let\}=\myrbrace
    468 \begingroup
    469   % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
    470   \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
    471   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
    472   \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
    473   @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
    474   @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
    475 @endgroup
    476 
    477 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
    478 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
    479 \let\, = \c
    480 \let\dotaccent = \.
    481 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
    482 \let\tieaccent = \t
    483 \let\ubaraccent = \b
    484 \let\udotaccent = \d
    485 
    486 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
    487 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
    488 \def\questiondown{?`}
    489 \def\exclamdown{!`}
    490 
    491 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
    492 \def\imacro{i}
    493 \def\jmacro{j}
    494 \def\dotless#1{%
    495   \def\temp{#1}%
    496   \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
    497   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
    498   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
    499   \fi\fi
    500 }
    501 
    502 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
    503 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
    504 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
    505 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
    506 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
    507 {\catcode`@ = 11
    508  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
    509  % if the definition is written into an index file.
    510  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
    511  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
    512 }
    513 
    514 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
    515 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
    516 
    517 % @* forces a line break.
    518 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
    519 
    520 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
    521 \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
    522 
    523 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
    524 \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
    525 
    526 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
    527 \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
    528 
    529 % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
    530 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
    531 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
    532 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
    533 
    534 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
    535 % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
    536 % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
    537 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
    538 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
    539 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
    540 % the text is small, which looks bad.
    541 %
    542 \def\group{\begingroup
    543   \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
    544     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
    545     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
    546   \fi
    547   %
    548   % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
    549   % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
    550   % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
    551   % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
    552   % above.  But it's pretty close.
    553   \def\Egroup{%
    554     \egroup           % End the \vtop.
    555     \endgroup         % End the \group.
    556   }%
    557   %
    558   \vtop\bgroup
    559     % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
    560     % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
    561     % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
    562     % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
    563     % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
    564     % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
    565     \everypar = {\strut}%
    566     %
    567     % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
    568     % normal interline spacing.
    569     \offinterlineskip
    570     %
    571     % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
    572     % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
    573     % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
    574     % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
    575     % empty paragraph.
    576     \ifx\par\lisppar
    577       \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
    578       %
    579       % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
    580       \obeylines
    581     \fi
    582     %
    583     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
    584     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
    585     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
    586     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
    587     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
    588     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
    589     \comment
    590 }
    591 %
    592 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
    593 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
    594 %
    595 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
    596 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
    597 where each line of input produces a line of output.}
    598 
    599 % @need space-in-mils
    600 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
    601 
    602 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
    603 
    604 \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
    605 
    606 % Old definition--didn't work.
    607 %\def\needx #1{\par %
    608 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
    609 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
    610 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
    611 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
    612 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
    613 %}}
    614 
    615 \def\needx#1{%
    616   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
    617   % paragraph.
    618   \par
    619   %
    620   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
    621   \dimen0 = #1\mil
    622   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
    623   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
    624   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
    625     %
    626     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
    627     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
    628     % And a page break here is fine.
    629     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
    630     %
    631     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
    632     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
    633     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
    634     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
    635     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
    636     %
    637     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
    638     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
    639     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
    640     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
    641     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
    642     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
    643     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
    644     \penalty9999
    645     %
    646     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
    647     \kern -#1\mil
    648     %
    649     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
    650     \nobreak
    651   \fi
    652 }
    653 
    654 % @br   forces paragraph break
    655 
    656 \let\br = \par
    657 
    658 % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
    659 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
    660 % font as three actual period characters.
    661 %
    662 \def\dots{%
    663   \leavevmode
    664   \hbox to 1.5em{%
    665     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
    666     .\hss.\hss.%
    667     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
    668   }%
    669 }
    670 
    671 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
    672 %
    673 \def\enddots{%
    674   \leavevmode
    675   \hbox to 2em{%
    676     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
    677     .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
    678     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
    679   }%
    680   \spacefactor=3000
    681 }
    682 
    683 
    684 % @page    forces the start of a new page
    685 %
    686 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
    687 
    688 % @exdent text....
    689 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
    690 
    691 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
    692 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
    693 \newskip\exdentamount
    694 
    695 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
    696 \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
    697 \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
    698 
    699 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
    700 \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
    701 \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
    702 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
    703 
    704 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
    705 % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
    706 % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
    707 %
    708 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
    709 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
    710 %
    711 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
    712   \nobreak
    713   \kern-\strutdepth
    714   \vtop to \strutdepth{%
    715     \baselineskip=\strutdepth
    716     \vss
    717     % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
    718     % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
    719     \ifx#1l%
    720       \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
    721     \else
    722       \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
    723     \fi
    724     \null
    725   }%
    726 }}
    727 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
    728 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
    729 %
    730 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
    731 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
    732 % else use TEXT for both).
    733 % 
    734 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
    735 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
    736   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 
    737   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
    738     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
    739     \def\righttext{#2}%
    740   \else
    741     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
    742     \def\righttext{#1}%
    743   \fi
    744   %
    745   \ifodd\pageno
    746     \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
    747   \else
    748     \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
    749   \fi
    750   \temp
    751 }
    752 
    753 % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
    754 % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
    755 \def\include{\begingroup
    756   \catcode`\\=12
    757   \catcode`~=12
    758   \catcode`^=12
    759   \catcode`_=12
    760   \catcode`|=12
    761   \catcode`<=12
    762   \catcode`>=12
    763   \catcode`+=12
    764   \parsearg\includezzz}
    765 % Restore active chars for included file.
    766 \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
    767   % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
    768   \def\thisfile{#1}%
    769   \input\thisfile
    770 \endgroup}
    771 
    772 \def\thisfile{}
    773 
    774 % @center line   outputs that line, centered
    775 
    776 \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
    777 \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
    778 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
    779 \centerline{#1}}}
    780 
    781 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
    782 
    783 \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
    784 \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
    785 
    786 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
    787 % @c is the same as @comment
    788 % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
    789 
    790 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
    791 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
    792 \commentxxx}
    793 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
    794 
    795 \let\c=\comment
    796 
    797 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
    798 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
    799 % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
    800 % 
    801 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
    802 \def\noneword{none}
    803 %
    804 \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
    805 \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
    806   \def\temp{#1}%
    807   \ifx\temp\asisword
    808   \else
    809     \ifx\temp\noneword
    810       \defaultparindent = 0pt
    811     \else
    812       \defaultparindent = #1em
    813     \fi
    814   \fi
    815   \parindent = \defaultparindent
    816 }
    817 
    818 % @exampleindent NCHARS
    819 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
    820 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
    821 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
    822 \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
    823 \def\doexampleindent#1{%
    824   \def\temp{#1}%
    825   \ifx\temp\asisword
    826   \else
    827     \ifx\temp\noneword
    828       \lispnarrowing = 0pt
    829     \else
    830       \lispnarrowing = #1em
    831     \fi
    832   \fi
    833 }
    834 
    835 % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
    836 %
    837 \def\asis#1{#1}
    838 
    839 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
    840 % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
    841 % to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
    842 % superscripts, special math chars, etc.
    843 % 
    844 % @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
    845 % entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
    846 % @math gets a chance to work.  This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
    847 % at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
    848 %
    849 \let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
    850 %
    851 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
    852 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
    853 % _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
    854 % if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
    855 % 
    856 {\catcode95 = \active  % 95 = _
    857 \gdef\mathunderscore{%
    858   \catcode95=\active
    859   \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
    860 }}
    861 %
    862 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
    863 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
    864 % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
    865 % otherwise define @\.
    866 % 
    867 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
    868 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
    869 %
    870 \def\math{%
    871   \tex
    872   \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
    873   \let\\ = \mathbackslash
    874   \implicitmath\finishmath}
    875 \def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
    876 
    877 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
    878 \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
    879 \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
    880 
    881 % @refill is a no-op.
    882 \let\refill=\relax
    883 
    884 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
    885 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
    886 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
    887 %
    888 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
    889 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
    890 
    891 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
    892 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
    893 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
    894 \def\setfilename{%
    895    \iflinks
    896      \readauxfile
    897    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
    898    \openindices
    899    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
    900    \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
    901    %
    902    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
    903    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
    904    % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
    905    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
    906    \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
    907    \closein1
    908    \temp
    909    %
    910    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
    911 }
    912 
    913 % Called from \setfilename.
    914 %
    915 \def\openindices{%
    916   \newindex{cp}%
    917   \newcodeindex{fn}%
    918   \newcodeindex{vr}%
    919   \newcodeindex{tp}%
    920   \newcodeindex{ky}%
    921   \newcodeindex{pg}%
    922 }
    923 
    924 % @bye.
    925 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
    926 
    927 
    928 \message{pdf,}
    929 % adobe `portable' document format
    930 \newcount\tempnum
    931 \newcount\lnkcount
    932 \newtoks\filename
    933 \newcount\filenamelength
    934 \newcount\pgn
    935 \newtoks\toksA
    936 \newtoks\toksB
    937 \newtoks\toksC
    938 \newtoks\toksD
    939 \newbox\boxA
    940 \newcount\countA
    941 \newif\ifpdf
    942 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
    943 
    944 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
    945   \pdffalse
    946   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
    947   \let\pdfurl = \gobble
    948   \let\endlink = \relax
    949   \let\linkcolor = \relax
    950   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
    951 \else
    952   \pdftrue
    953   \pdfoutput = 1
    954   \input pdfcolor
    955   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
    956     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
    957     \def\imageheight{#3}%
    958     % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
    959     % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
    960     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
    961       \immediate\pdfimage
    962     \else
    963       \immediate\pdfximage
    964     \fi
    965       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
    966       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
    967       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
    968 	 #1.pdf%
    969        \else
    970          {#1.pdf}%
    971        \fi
    972     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
    973       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
    974     \fi}
    975   \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
    976   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
    977   \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
    978   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
    979   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
    980   % come from Petr Olsak
    981   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
    982     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
    983   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
    984     \advance\tempnum by1
    985     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
    986   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
    987     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
    988     \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
    989       \closein 1 
    990       \indexnofonts
    991       \def\tt{}
    992       \let\_ = \normalunderscore
    993       % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  
    994       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
    995       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
    996       %
    997       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
    998       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
    999       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
   1000       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
   1001       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
   1002       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
   1003       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
   1004       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
   1005       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
   1006       \input \jobname.toc
   1007       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
   1008         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
   1009       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
   1010       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
   1011         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
   1012       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
   1013         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
   1014       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
   1015         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
   1016       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
   1017         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
   1018       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
   1019         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
   1020       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
   1021         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
   1022       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
   1023         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
   1024       \input \jobname.toc
   1025     \endgroup\fi
   1026   }}
   1027   \def\makelinks #1,{%
   1028     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
   1029     \ifx\params\E
   1030       \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
   1031     \else
   1032       \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
   1033       \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
   1034       \picknum{#1}%
   1035       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 
   1036         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
   1037       \linkcolor #1%
   1038       \advance\lnkcount by 1%
   1039       \endlink
   1040     \fi
   1041     \nextmakelinks
   1042   }
   1043   \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
   1044   \def\pn#1{%
   1045     \def\p{#1}%
   1046     \ifx\p\lbrace
   1047       \let\nextpn=\ppn
   1048     \else
   1049       \let\nextpn=\ppnn
   1050       \def\first{#1}
   1051     \fi
   1052     \nextpn
   1053   }
   1054   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
   1055   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
   1056   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
   1057   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
   1058   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
   1059     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
   1060     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
   1061       \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
   1062         \advance\filenamelength by 1
   1063       \fi
   1064     \fi
   1065     \nextsp}
   1066   \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
   1067   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
   1068     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
   1069   \else
   1070     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
   1071   \fi
   1072   \def\pdfurl#1{%
   1073     \begingroup
   1074       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
   1075       \let\value=\expandablevalue
   1076       \leavevmode\Red
   1077       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
   1078         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
   1079         % #1
   1080     \endgroup}
   1081   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
   1082   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
   1083   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
   1084   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
   1085   \def\maketoks{%
   1086     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
   1087     \ifx\first0\adn0
   1088     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
   1089     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
   1090     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 
   1091     \else
   1092       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
   1093       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
   1094         \let\next=\maketoks
   1095         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
   1096         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
   1097       \fi
   1098     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
   1099     \next}
   1100   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
   1101     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
   1102   \def\pdflink#1{%
   1103     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
   1104     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
   1105   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
   1106 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
   1107 
   1108 
   1109 \message{fonts,}
   1110 % Font-change commands.
   1111 
   1112 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
   1113 % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
   1114 \newfam\sffam
   1115 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
   1116 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
   1117 
   1118 % We don't need math for this one.
   1119 \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
   1120 
   1121 % Default leading.
   1122 \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
   1123 
   1124 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
   1125 % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
   1126 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
   1127 %
   1128 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
   1129 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
   1130 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
   1131 %
   1132 \def\setleading#1{%
   1133   \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
   1134   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
   1135   \normalbaselines
   1136   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
   1137     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
   1138                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
   1139   }%
   1140 }
   1141 
   1142 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
   1143 % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
   1144 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
   1145 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
   1146 
   1147 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
   1148 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
   1149 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
   1150 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
   1151 \def\fontprefix{cm}
   1152 \fi
   1153 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
   1154 \def\rmshape{r}
   1155 \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
   1156 \def\bfshape{b}
   1157 \def\bxshape{bx}
   1158 \def\ttshape{tt}
   1159 \def\ttbshape{tt}
   1160 \def\ttslshape{sltt}
   1161 \def\itshape{ti}
   1162 \def\itbshape{bxti}
   1163 \def\slshape{sl}
   1164 \def\slbshape{bxsl}
   1165 \def\sfshape{ss}
   1166 \def\sfbshape{ss}
   1167 \def\scshape{csc}
   1168 \def\scbshape{csc}
   1169 
   1170 \newcount\mainmagstep
   1171 \ifx\bigger\relax
   1172   % not really supported.
   1173   \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
   1174   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
   1175   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
   1176 \else
   1177   \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
   1178   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1179   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1180 \fi
   1181 % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
   1182 % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
   1183 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
   1184 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1185 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1186 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1187 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1188 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1189 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
   1190 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
   1191 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
   1192 
   1193 % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
   1194 \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
   1195 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
   1196 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
   1197 
   1198 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
   1199 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
   1200 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
   1201 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
   1202 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
   1203 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
   1204 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
   1205 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
   1206 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
   1207 \font\smalli=cmmi9
   1208 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
   1209 
   1210 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
   1211 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
   1212 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
   1213 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
   1214 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
   1215 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
   1216 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
   1217 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
   1218 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
   1219 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
   1220 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
   1221 
   1222 % Fonts for title page:
   1223 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
   1224 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
   1225 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
   1226 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
   1227 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
   1228 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
   1229 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
   1230 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
   1231 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
   1232 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
   1233 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
   1234 
   1235 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
   1236 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
   1237 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
   1238 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
   1239 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
   1240 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
   1241 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
   1242 \let\chapbf=\chaprm
   1243 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
   1244 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
   1245 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
   1246 
   1247 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
   1248 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
   1249 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
   1250 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
   1251 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
   1252 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
   1253 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
   1254 \let\secbf\secrm
   1255 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
   1256 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
   1257 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
   1258 
   1259 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
   1260 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
   1261 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
   1262 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
   1263 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
   1264 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
   1265 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
   1266 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
   1267 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
   1268 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
   1269 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
   1270 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
   1271 % but that is not a standard magnification.
   1272 
   1273 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
   1274 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
   1275 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
   1276 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
   1277 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
   1278 %
   1279 \def\resetmathfonts{%
   1280   \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
   1281   \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
   1282   \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
   1283 }
   1284 
   1285 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
   1286 % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
   1287 % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
   1288 % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
   1289 % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
   1290 % redefine \bf itself.
   1291 \def\textfonts{%
   1292   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
   1293   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
   1294   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
   1295   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
   1296 \def\titlefonts{%
   1297   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
   1298   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
   1299   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
   1300   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
   1301   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
   1302 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
   1303 \def\chapfonts{%
   1304   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
   1305   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
   1306   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
   1307   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
   1308 \def\secfonts{%
   1309   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
   1310   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
   1311   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
   1312   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
   1313 \def\subsecfonts{%
   1314   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
   1315   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
   1316   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
   1317   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
   1318 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
   1319 \def\smallfonts{%
   1320   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
   1321   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
   1322   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
   1323   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
   1324   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
   1325 \def\smallerfonts{%
   1326   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
   1327   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
   1328   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
   1329   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
   1330   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
   1331 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
   1332 
   1333 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
   1334 %
   1335 \textfonts
   1336 
   1337 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
   1338 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
   1339 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
   1340 
   1341 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
   1342 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
   1343 
   1344 % Fonts for short table of contents.
   1345 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
   1346 \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
   1347 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
   1348 
   1349 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
   1350 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
   1351 
   1352 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
   1353 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
   1354 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
   1355 \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
   1356 \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
   1357 
   1358 \let\i=\smartitalic
   1359 \let\var=\smartslanted
   1360 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
   1361 \let\emph=\smartitalic
   1362 \let\cite=\smartslanted
   1363 
   1364 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
   1365 \let\strong=\b
   1366 
   1367 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
   1368 % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
   1369 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
   1370 %
   1371 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
   1372 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
   1373 
   1374 \def\t#1{%
   1375   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
   1376   \null
   1377 }
   1378 \let\ttfont=\t
   1379 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
   1380 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
   1381 \font\keysy=cmsy9
   1382 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
   1383   \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
   1384     \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
   1385      \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
   1386     \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
   1387   \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
   1388 % The old definition, with no lozenge:
   1389 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
   1390 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
   1391 
   1392 % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
   1393 \let\file=\samp
   1394 \let\option=\samp
   1395 
   1396 % @code is a modification of @t,
   1397 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
   1398 \def\tclose#1{%
   1399   {%
   1400     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
   1401     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
   1402     %
   1403     % Switch to typewriter.
   1404     \tt
   1405     %
   1406     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
   1407     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
   1408     %
   1409     % Turn off hyphenation.
   1410     \nohyphenation
   1411     %
   1412     \rawbackslash
   1413     \frenchspacing
   1414     #1%
   1415   }%
   1416   \null
   1417 }
   1418 
   1419 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
   1420 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
   1421 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
   1422 
   1423 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
   1424 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
   1425 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
   1426 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
   1427 %  -- rms.
   1428 {
   1429   \catcode`\-=\active
   1430   \catcode`\_=\active
   1431   %
   1432   \global\def\code{\begingroup
   1433     \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
   1434     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
   1435     \codex
   1436   }
   1437   %
   1438   % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
   1439   % just treat them as a normal -.
   1440   \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
   1441 }
   1442 
   1443 \def\realdash{-}
   1444 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
   1445 \def\codeunder{%
   1446   % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
   1447   % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
   1448   % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
   1449   % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
   1450   \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
   1451                \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
   1452              \else\normalunderscore \fi
   1453              \discretionary{}{}{}}%
   1454             {\_}%
   1455 }
   1456 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
   1457 
   1458 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
   1459 % then @kbd has no effect.
   1460 
   1461 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
   1462 %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
   1463 %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
   1464 \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
   1465 \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
   1466   \def\arg{#1}%
   1467   \ifx\arg\worddistinct
   1468     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
   1469   \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
   1470     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
   1471   \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
   1472     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
   1473   \fi\fi\fi
   1474 }
   1475 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
   1476 \def\wordexample{example}
   1477 \def\wordcode{code}
   1478 
   1479 % Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
   1480 % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
   1481 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
   1482 
   1483 \def\xkey{\key}
   1484 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
   1485 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
   1486 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
   1487 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
   1488 
   1489 % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
   1490 \let\url=\code
   1491 \let\env=\code
   1492 \let\command=\code
   1493 
   1494 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
   1495 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
   1496 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
   1497 % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
   1498 % a hypertex \special here.
   1499 %
   1500 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
   1501 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
   1502   \unsepspaces
   1503   \pdfurl{#1}%
   1504   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
   1505   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
   1506     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
   1507   \else
   1508     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
   1509     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
   1510       \ifpdf
   1511         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
   1512       \else
   1513         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
   1514       \fi
   1515     \else
   1516       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
   1517     \fi
   1518   \fi
   1519   \endlink
   1520 \endgroup}
   1521 
   1522 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
   1523 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
   1524 % 
   1525 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
   1526 \ifpdf
   1527   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
   1528   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
   1529     \unsepspaces
   1530     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
   1531     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
   1532     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
   1533     \endlink
   1534   \endgroup}
   1535 \else
   1536   \let\email=\uref
   1537 \fi
   1538 
   1539 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
   1540 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
   1541 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
   1542 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
   1543 %
   1544 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
   1545 
   1546 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
   1547 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
   1548 %
   1549 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
   1550 
   1551 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
   1552 
   1553 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
   1554 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
   1555 % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
   1556 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
   1557 
   1558 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
   1559 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
   1560 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
   1561 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
   1562 
   1563 % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
   1564 \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
   1565 
   1566 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
   1567 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
   1568 
   1569 
   1570 \message{page headings,}
   1571 
   1572 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
   1573 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
   1574 
   1575 % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
   1576 \newif\ifseenauthor
   1577 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
   1578 
   1579 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
   1580 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
   1581 %
   1582 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
   1583  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
   1584 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
   1585  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
   1586 
   1587 \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
   1588 \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
   1589         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
   1590 
   1591 \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
   1592    \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
   1593    \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
   1594    %
   1595    \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
   1596    %
   1597    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
   1598    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
   1599    %
   1600    % Now you can print the title using @title.
   1601    \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
   1602    \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
   1603                     % print a rule at the page bottom also.
   1604                     \finishedtitlepagefalse
   1605                     \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
   1606    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
   1607    \finishedtitlepagetrue
   1608    %
   1609    % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
   1610    \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
   1611    \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
   1612    %
   1613    % @author should come last, but may come many times.
   1614    \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
   1615    \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
   1616       {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
   1617    %
   1618    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
   1619    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
   1620    \let\oldpage = \page
   1621    \def\page{%
   1622       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
   1623          \finishtitlepage
   1624       \fi
   1625       \oldpage
   1626       \let\page = \oldpage
   1627       \hbox{}}%
   1628 %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
   1629 }
   1630 
   1631 \def\Etitlepage{%
   1632    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
   1633       \finishtitlepage
   1634    \fi
   1635    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
   1636    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
   1637    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
   1638    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
   1639    \oldpage
   1640    \endgroup
   1641    %
   1642    % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
   1643    % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
   1644    \HEADINGSon
   1645    %
   1646    % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
   1647    \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
   1648      \shortcontents
   1649      \contents
   1650      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
   1651      \global\let\contents = \relax
   1652    \fi
   1653    %
   1654    \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
   1655      \contents
   1656      \global\let\contents = \relax
   1657      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
   1658    \fi
   1659 }
   1660 
   1661 \def\finishtitlepage{%
   1662    \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
   1663    \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
   1664    \finishedtitlepagetrue
   1665 }
   1666 
   1667 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
   1668 
   1669 \let\thispage=\folio
   1670 
   1671 \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
   1672 \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
   1673 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
   1674 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
   1675 
   1676 % Now make Tex use those variables
   1677 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
   1678                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
   1679 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
   1680                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
   1681 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
   1682 
   1683 % Commands to set those variables.
   1684 % For example, this is what  @headings on  does
   1685 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
   1686 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
   1687 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
   1688 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
   1689 
   1690 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
   1691 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
   1692 \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
   1693 
   1694 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
   1695 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
   1696 \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
   1697 
   1698 {\catcode`\@=0 %
   1699 
   1700 \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
   1701 \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
   1702 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
   1703 
   1704 \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
   1705 \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
   1706 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
   1707 
   1708 \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
   1709 
   1710 \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
   1711 \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
   1712 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
   1713 
   1714 \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
   1715 \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
   1716   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
   1717   %
   1718   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
   1719   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
   1720   \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
   1721   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
   1722 }
   1723 
   1724 \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
   1725 %
   1726 }% unbind the catcode of @.
   1727 
   1728 % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
   1729 % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
   1730 % @headings off         turns them off.
   1731 % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
   1732 % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
   1733 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
   1734 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
   1735 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
   1736 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
   1737 
   1738 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
   1739 
   1740 \def\HEADINGSoff{
   1741 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
   1742 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
   1743 \HEADINGSoff
   1744 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
   1745 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
   1746 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
   1747 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
   1748 % edge of all pages.
   1749 \def\HEADINGSdouble{
   1750 \global\pageno=1
   1751 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
   1752 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
   1753 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
   1754 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
   1755 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
   1756 }
   1757 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
   1758 
   1759 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
   1760 % page number on top right.
   1761 \def\HEADINGSsingle{
   1762 \global\pageno=1
   1763 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
   1764 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
   1765 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
   1766 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
   1767 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
   1768 }
   1769 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
   1770 
   1771 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
   1772 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
   1773 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
   1774 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
   1775 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
   1776 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
   1777 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
   1778 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
   1779 }
   1780 
   1781 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
   1782 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
   1783 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
   1784 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
   1785 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
   1786 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
   1787 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
   1788 }
   1789 
   1790 % Subroutines used in generating headings
   1791 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
   1792 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
   1793 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
   1794 \ifx\today\undefined
   1795 \def\today{%
   1796   \number\day\space
   1797   \ifcase\month
   1798   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
   1799   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
   1800   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
   1801   \fi
   1802   \space\number\year}
   1803 \fi
   1804 
   1805 % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
   1806 % It generates no output of its own.
   1807 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
   1808 \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
   1809 \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
   1810 
   1811 
   1812 \message{tables,}
   1813 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
   1814 
   1815 % default indentation of table text
   1816 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
   1817 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
   1818 \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
   1819 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
   1820 \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
   1821 
   1822 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
   1823 \newdimen\itemmax
   1824 
   1825 % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
   1826 % these defs.
   1827 % They also define \itemindex
   1828 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
   1829 
   1830 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
   1831 
   1832 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
   1833 
   1834 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
   1835 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
   1836 
   1837 \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
   1838 \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
   1839 
   1840 \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
   1841 \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
   1842 
   1843 \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
   1844                  \itemzzz {#1}}
   1845 
   1846 \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
   1847                  \itemzzz {#1}}
   1848 
   1849 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
   1850   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
   1851   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
   1852   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
   1853   \itemindex{#1}%
   1854   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
   1855   %
   1856   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
   1857   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
   1858   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
   1859   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
   1860   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
   1861   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
   1862     %
   1863     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
   1864     % but leave it ragged-right.
   1865     \begingroup
   1866       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
   1867       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
   1868       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
   1869       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
   1870     \endgroup
   1871     %
   1872     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
   1873     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
   1874     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
   1875     %
   1876     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
   1877     % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
   1878     % \baselineskip glue.
   1879     \nobreak
   1880     \endgroup
   1881     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
   1882   \else
   1883     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
   1884     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
   1885     \noindent
   1886     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
   1887     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
   1888     % eventually be printed.
   1889     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
   1890     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
   1891     \unhbox0
   1892     \nobreak\kern\dimen0
   1893     \endgroup
   1894     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
   1895   \fi
   1896 }
   1897 
   1898 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
   1899 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
   1900 \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
   1901 \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
   1902 \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
   1903 \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
   1904 
   1905 % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
   1906 \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
   1907 
   1908 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
   1909 \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
   1910 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
   1911 \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
   1912 \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
   1913 
   1914 \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
   1915 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
   1916 \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
   1917 \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
   1918 \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
   1919 \let\Etable=\relax}}
   1920 
   1921 \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
   1922 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
   1923 \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
   1924 \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
   1925 \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
   1926 \let\Etable=\relax}}
   1927 
   1928 \def\dontindex #1{}
   1929 \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
   1930 \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
   1931 
   1932 {\obeyspaces %
   1933 \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
   1934 \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
   1935 
   1936 \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
   1937 \aboveenvbreak %
   1938 \begingroup %
   1939 \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
   1940 \let\itemindex=#1%
   1941 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
   1942 \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
   1943 \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
   1944 \def\itemfont{#2}%
   1945 \itemmax=\tableindent %
   1946 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
   1947 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
   1948 \exdentamount=\tableindent
   1949 \parindent = 0pt
   1950 \parskip = \smallskipamount
   1951 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
   1952 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
   1953 \let\item = \internalBitem %
   1954 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
   1955 \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
   1956 \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
   1957 \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
   1958 \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
   1959 }
   1960 
   1961 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
   1962 
   1963 \newcount \itemno
   1964 
   1965 \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
   1966 
   1967 \def\itemizezzz #1{%
   1968   \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
   1969   \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
   1970 }
   1971 
   1972 \def\itemizey #1#2{%
   1973 \aboveenvbreak %
   1974 \itemmax=\itemindent %
   1975 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
   1976 \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
   1977 \exdentamount=\itemindent
   1978 \parindent = 0pt %
   1979 \parskip = \smallskipamount %
   1980 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
   1981 \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
   1982 \def\itemcontents{#1}%
   1983 \let\item=\itemizeitem}
   1984 
   1985 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
   1986 % These are `.?!:;,'
   1987 \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
   1988   \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
   1989 
   1990 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
   1991 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
   1992 %
   1993 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
   1994 
   1995 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
   1996 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
   1997 % argument is the same as `1'.
   1998 %
   1999 \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
   2000 \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
   2001 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
   2002   \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
   2003   %
   2004   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
   2005   \def\thearg{#1}%
   2006   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
   2007   %
   2008   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
   2009   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
   2010   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
   2011   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
   2012   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
   2013   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
   2014   \ifx\rest\empty
   2015     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
   2016     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
   2017     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
   2018     %   not equal to itself.
   2019     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
   2020     %
   2021     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
   2022     % continuing to look for a <number>.
   2023     %
   2024     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
   2025       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
   2026     \else
   2027       % It's a letter.
   2028       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
   2029         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
   2030       \else
   2031         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
   2032       \fi
   2033     \fi
   2034   \else
   2035     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
   2036     \numericenumerate
   2037   \fi
   2038 }
   2039 
   2040 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
   2041 % given in \thearg.
   2042 %
   2043 \def\numericenumerate{%
   2044   \itemno = \thearg
   2045   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
   2046 }
   2047 
   2048 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
   2049 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
   2050   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
   2051   \startenumeration{%
   2052     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
   2053     \ifnum\itemno=0
   2054       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
   2055                   alphabet}%
   2056     \fi
   2057     \char\lccode\itemno
   2058   }%
   2059 }
   2060 
   2061 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
   2062 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
   2063   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
   2064   \startenumeration{%
   2065     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
   2066     \ifnum\itemno=0
   2067       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
   2068                   alphabet}
   2069     \fi
   2070     \char\uccode\itemno
   2071   }%
   2072 }
   2073 
   2074 % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
   2075 % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
   2076 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
   2077 %
   2078 \def\startenumeration#1{%
   2079   \advance\itemno by -1
   2080   \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
   2081 }
   2082 
   2083 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
   2084 % to @enumerate.
   2085 %
   2086 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
   2087 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
   2088 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
   2089 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
   2090 
   2091 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
   2092 
   2093 \def\itemizeitem{%
   2094 \advance\itemno by 1
   2095 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
   2096 \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
   2097 {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
   2098 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
   2099 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
   2100 \flushcr}
   2101 
   2102 % @multitable macros
   2103 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
   2104 %
   2105 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
   2106 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
   2107 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
   2108 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
   2109 
   2110 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
   2111 
   2112 % To make preamble:
   2113 %
   2114 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
   2115 %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
   2116 %   @item ...
   2117 %
   2118 %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
   2119 %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
   2120 %   columns as desired.
   2121 
   2122 
   2123 % Or use a template:
   2124 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
   2125 %   @item ...
   2126 %   using the widest term desired in each column.
   2127 %
   2128 % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
   2129 % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
   2130 % will parse correctly, i.e.,
   2131 %
   2132 %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
   2133 %      template}
   2134 % Not:
   2135 %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
   2136 %      {Column 3 template}
   2137 
   2138 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
   2139 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
   2140 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
   2141 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
   2142 
   2143 % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
   2144 % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
   2145 
   2146 % Sample multitable:
   2147 
   2148 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
   2149 %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
   2150 %   @item
   2151 %   first col stuff
   2152 %   @tab
   2153 %   second col stuff
   2154 %   @tab
   2155 %   third col
   2156 %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
   2157 %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
   2158 %
   2159 %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
   2160 %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
   2161 %   @end multitable
   2162 
   2163 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
   2164 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
   2165 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
   2166 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
   2167 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
   2168 %                                                            to baseline.
   2169 %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
   2170 %
   2171 \newskip\multitableparskip
   2172 \newskip\multitableparindent
   2173 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
   2174 \newskip\multitablelinespace
   2175 \multitableparskip=0pt
   2176 \multitableparindent=6pt
   2177 \multitablecolspace=12pt
   2178 \multitablelinespace=0pt
   2179 
   2180 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
   2181 %
   2182 \let\endsetuptable\relax
   2183 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
   2184 \let\columnfractions\relax
   2185 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
   2186 \newif\ifsetpercent
   2187 
   2188 % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
   2189 % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
   2190 % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
   2191 % percent of \hsize for this column.
   2192 \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
   2193   \global\advance\colcount by 1
   2194   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
   2195   \setuptable
   2196 }
   2197 
   2198 \newcount\colcount
   2199 \def\setuptable#1{%
   2200   \def\firstarg{#1}%
   2201   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
   2202     \let\go = \relax
   2203   \else
   2204     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
   2205       \global\setpercenttrue
   2206     \else
   2207       \ifsetpercent
   2208          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
   2209       \else
   2210          \global\advance\colcount by 1
   2211          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
   2212                             % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
   2213          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
   2214       \fi
   2215     \fi
   2216     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
   2217       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
   2218       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
   2219       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
   2220     \else
   2221       \let\go = \setuptable
   2222     \fi%
   2223   \fi
   2224   \go
   2225 }
   2226 
   2227 % This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
   2228 % not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
   2229 % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
   2230 % --karl, nathan (a] acm.org, 20apr99.
   2231 \def\tab{&}
   2232 
   2233 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
   2234 %
   2235 \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
   2236 \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
   2237   \vskip\parskip
   2238   \let\item\crcr
   2239   \tolerance=9500
   2240   \hbadness=9500
   2241   \setmultitablespacing
   2242   \parskip=\multitableparskip
   2243   \parindent=\multitableparindent
   2244   \overfullrule=0pt
   2245   \global\colcount=0
   2246   \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
   2247   %
   2248   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
   2249   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
   2250   %
   2251   % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
   2252   % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
   2253   % The table preamble
   2254   % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
   2255   \everycr{\noalign{%
   2256   %
   2257   % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
   2258   % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
   2259   % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
   2260   % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
   2261     \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
   2262   %
   2263   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
   2264   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
   2265   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
   2266   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
   2267   \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
   2268     \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
   2269   %
   2270   % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
   2271   % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
   2272   % the first one.
   2273   %
   2274   % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
   2275   % to the width of each template entry.
   2276   %
   2277   % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
   2278   % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
   2279   % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
   2280   % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
   2281   %
   2282   % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
   2283   \rightskip=0pt
   2284   \ifnum\colcount=1
   2285     % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
   2286     \advance\hsize by\leftskip
   2287   \else
   2288     \ifsetpercent \else
   2289       % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
   2290       % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
   2291       \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
   2292     \fi
   2293    % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
   2294   \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
   2295   \fi
   2296   % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
   2297   % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
   2298   % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
   2299   % For example:
   2300   % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
   2301   % @item @code{#}
   2302   % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
   2303   % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
   2304   % characters.
   2305   \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
   2306 }
   2307 
   2308 \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
   2309 % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
   2310 % current baselineskip.
   2311 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
   2312 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
   2313 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
   2314 %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
   2315 %% to keep lines equally spaced
   2316 \let\multistrut = \strut
   2317 \else
   2318 %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
   2319 \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
   2320 width0pt\relax} \fi
   2321 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
   2322 %% table. If not, do nothing.
   2323 %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
   2324 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
   2325 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
   2326 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
   2327                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
   2328 \fi%
   2329 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
   2330 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
   2331 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
   2332                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
   2333 \fi}
   2334 
   2335 
   2336 \message{conditionals,}
   2337 % Prevent errors for section commands.
   2338 % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
   2339 \def\ignoresections{%
   2340   \let\chapter=\relax
   2341   \let\unnumbered=\relax
   2342   \let\top=\relax
   2343   \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
   2344   \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
   2345   \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
   2346   \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
   2347   \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
   2348   \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
   2349   \let\section=\relax
   2350   \let\subsec=\relax
   2351   \let\subsubsec=\relax
   2352   \let\subsection=\relax
   2353   \let\subsubsection=\relax
   2354   \let\appendix=\relax
   2355   \let\appendixsec=\relax
   2356   \let\appendixsection=\relax
   2357   \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
   2358   \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
   2359   \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
   2360   \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
   2361   \let\contents=\relax
   2362   \let\smallbook=\relax
   2363   \let\titlepage=\relax
   2364 }
   2365 
   2366 % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
   2367 % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
   2368 % incorrectly.
   2369 %
   2370 \def\ignoremorecommands{%
   2371   \let\defcodeindex = \relax
   2372   \let\defcv = \relax
   2373   \let\deffn = \relax
   2374   \let\deffnx = \relax
   2375   \let\defindex = \relax
   2376   \let\defivar = \relax
   2377   \let\defmac = \relax
   2378   \let\defmethod = \relax
   2379   \let\defop = \relax
   2380   \let\defopt = \relax
   2381   \let\defspec = \relax
   2382   \let\deftp = \relax
   2383   \let\deftypefn = \relax
   2384   \let\deftypefun = \relax
   2385   \let\deftypeivar = \relax
   2386   \let\deftypeop = \relax
   2387   \let\deftypevar = \relax
   2388   \let\deftypevr = \relax
   2389   \let\defun = \relax
   2390   \let\defvar = \relax
   2391   \let\defvr = \relax
   2392   \let\ref = \relax
   2393   \let\xref = \relax
   2394   \let\printindex = \relax
   2395   \let\pxref = \relax
   2396   \let\settitle = \relax
   2397   \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
   2398   \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
   2399   \let\everyheading = \relax
   2400   \let\evenheading = \relax
   2401   \let\oddheading = \relax
   2402   \let\everyfooting = \relax
   2403   \let\evenfooting = \relax
   2404   \let\oddfooting = \relax
   2405   \let\headings = \relax
   2406   \let\include = \relax
   2407   \let\lowersections = \relax
   2408   \let\down = \relax
   2409   \let\raisesections = \relax
   2410   \let\up = \relax
   2411   \let\set = \relax
   2412   \let\clear = \relax
   2413   \let\item = \relax
   2414 }
   2415 
   2416 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
   2417 % @direntry, and @documentdescription.
   2418 %
   2419 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
   2420 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
   2421 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
   2422 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
   2423 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
   2424 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
   2425 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
   2426 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
   2427 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
   2428 \def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
   2429 
   2430 % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
   2431 % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
   2432 \let\dircategory = \comment
   2433 
   2434 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
   2435 %
   2436 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
   2437   % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
   2438   \ignoresections
   2439   %
   2440   % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
   2441   % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
   2442   % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
   2443   \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
   2444   %
   2445   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
   2446   \catcode32 = 10
   2447   %
   2448   % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
   2449   \catcode`\{ = 9
   2450   \catcode`\} = 9
   2451   %
   2452   % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
   2453   \catcode`\@ = 12
   2454   %
   2455   \def\ignoreword{#1}%
   2456   \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
   2457     % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
   2458     % `documentdescription' contains a `c'.  Means not everything will
   2459     % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
   2460   \else
   2461     % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
   2462     % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
   2463     %   @c @end ifinfo
   2464     % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
   2465     % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
   2466     \catcode`\c = 14
   2467   \fi
   2468   %
   2469   % And now expand the command defined above.
   2470   \doignoretext
   2471 }
   2472 
   2473 % What we do to finish off ignored text.
   2474 %
   2475 \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
   2476 
   2477 \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
   2478 \def\obstexwarn{%
   2479   \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
   2480   % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
   2481   % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
   2482     \immediate\write16{}
   2483     \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
   2484     \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
   2485     \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
   2486     \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
   2487     \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
   2488     \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
   2489     \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
   2490     \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
   2491     \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
   2492     \immediate\write16{}
   2493     \global\warnedobstrue
   2494     \fi
   2495 }
   2496 
   2497 % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
   2498 % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
   2499 % uncomment the following line:
   2500 %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
   2501 
   2502 % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
   2503 % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
   2504 %
   2505 \def\nestedignore#1{%
   2506   \obstexwarn
   2507   % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
   2508   % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
   2509   % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
   2510   % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
   2511   % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
   2512   %
   2513   \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
   2514     % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
   2515     \ignoresections
   2516     %
   2517     % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
   2518     % @end command again.
   2519     \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
   2520     %
   2521     % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
   2522     % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
   2523     % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
   2524     % undefine them.
   2525     %
   2526     % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
   2527     % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
   2528     \ignoremorecommands
   2529     %
   2530     % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
   2531     % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
   2532     % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
   2533     % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
   2534     % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
   2535     % stuff compared to the main input.
   2536     %
   2537     \nullfont
   2538     \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
   2539     \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
   2540     \let\tensf=\nullfont
   2541     % Similarly for index fonts.
   2542     \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
   2543     \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
   2544     \let\smallsf=\nullfont
   2545     % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
   2546     \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
   2547     \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
   2548     \let\smallersf=\nullfont
   2549     %
   2550     % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
   2551     \tracinglostchars = 0
   2552     %
   2553     % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
   2554     \frenchspacing
   2555     %
   2556     % Don't report underfull hboxes.
   2557     \hbadness = 10000
   2558     %
   2559     % Do minimal line-breaking.
   2560     \pretolerance = 10000
   2561     %
   2562     % Do not execute instructions in @tex
   2563     \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
   2564     % Do not execute macro definitions.
   2565     % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
   2566     \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
   2567 }
   2568 
   2569 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
   2570 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
   2571 %
   2572 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
   2573 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
   2574 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
   2575 % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
   2576 % losing inside @example, for instance.
   2577 %
   2578 \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
   2579   \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
   2580   \parsearg\setxxx}
   2581 \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
   2582 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
   2583   \def\temp{#2}%
   2584   \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
   2585   \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
   2586   \fi
   2587   \endgroup
   2588 }
   2589 % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
   2590 % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
   2591 % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
   2592 \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
   2593 
   2594 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
   2595 %
   2596 \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
   2597 \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
   2598 
   2599 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
   2600 {
   2601   \catcode`\_ = \active
   2602   %
   2603   % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
   2604   % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
   2605   % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
   2606   \gdef\value{\begingroup
   2607     \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
   2608     \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
   2609     \valuexxx}
   2610 }
   2611 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
   2612 
   2613 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
   2614 % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
   2615 % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
   2616 % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
   2617 % winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
   2618 % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
   2619 % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
   2620 % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
   2621 %
   2622 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
   2623   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
   2624     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
   2625   \else
   2626     \csname SET#1\endcsname
   2627   \fi
   2628 }
   2629 
   2630 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
   2631 % with @set.
   2632 %
   2633 \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
   2634 \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
   2635   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
   2636     \expandafter\ifsetfail
   2637   \else
   2638     \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
   2639   \fi
   2640 }
   2641 \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
   2642 \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
   2643 \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
   2644 
   2645 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
   2646 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
   2647 %
   2648 \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
   2649 \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
   2650   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
   2651     \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
   2652   \else
   2653     \expandafter\ifclearfail
   2654   \fi
   2655 }
   2656 \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
   2657 \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
   2658 \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
   2659 
   2660 % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
   2661 % read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
   2662 % `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
   2663 %
   2664 \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
   2665 \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
   2666 \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
   2667 \def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
   2668 \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
   2669 \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
   2670 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
   2671 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
   2672 
   2673 % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
   2674 % @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
   2675 % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
   2676 % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
   2677 % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
   2678 % the @ifset might be nested.)
   2679 %
   2680 \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
   2681   \edef\temp{%
   2682     % Remember the current value of \E#1.
   2683     \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
   2684     %
   2685     % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
   2686     \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
   2687   }%
   2688   \temp
   2689 }
   2690 
   2691 % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
   2692 % control sequences after we've constructed them.
   2693 %
   2694 \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
   2695 
   2696 % @defininfoenclose.
   2697 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
   2698 
   2699 
   2700 \message{indexing,}
   2701 % Index generation facilities
   2702 
   2703 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
   2704 % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
   2705 {\catcode`\@=11
   2706 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
   2707 
   2708 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
   2709 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
   2710 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
   2711 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
   2712 % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
   2713 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
   2714 % for the sake of vms.
   2715 %
   2716 \def\newindex#1{%
   2717   \iflinks
   2718     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
   2719     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
   2720   \fi
   2721   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
   2722     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
   2723 }
   2724 
   2725 % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
   2726 %
   2727 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
   2728 
   2729 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
   2730 %
   2731 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
   2732 %
   2733 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
   2734   \iflinks
   2735     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
   2736     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
   2737   \fi
   2738   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
   2739     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
   2740 }
   2741 
   2742 
   2743 % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
   2744 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
   2745 % 
   2746 % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
   2747 % inside @code.
   2748 % 
   2749 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
   2750 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
   2751 
   2752 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
   2753 % #3 the target index (bar).
   2754 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
   2755   % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
   2756   % closing the target index.
   2757   \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
   2758     % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
   2759     % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
   2760     \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
   2761     \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
   2762   \fi
   2763   % redefine \fooindfile:
   2764   \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
   2765   \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
   2766   % redefine \fooindex:
   2767   \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
   2768 }
   2769 
   2770 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
   2771 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
   2772 %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
   2773 
   2774 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
   2775 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
   2776 
   2777 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
   2778 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
   2779 
   2780 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
   2781 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
   2782 
   2783 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
   2784 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
   2785 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
   2786 
   2787 % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
   2788 % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
   2789 % laboriously list every single command here.)
   2790 % 
   2791 \def\indexdummies{%
   2792 \def\ { }%
   2793 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
   2794 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
   2795 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
   2796 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  
   2797 \let\{ = \mylbrace
   2798 \let\} = \myrbrace
   2799 \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
   2800 \normalturnoffactive
   2801 %
   2802 % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
   2803 \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
   2804 \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
   2805 \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
   2806 \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
   2807 \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
   2808 \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
   2809 \def\={\realbackslash =}%
   2810 \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
   2811 \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
   2812 \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
   2813 \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
   2814 \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
   2815 \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
   2816 \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
   2817 % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
   2818 \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
   2819 \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
   2820 \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
   2821 \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
   2822 \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
   2823 \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
   2824 \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
   2825 \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
   2826 \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
   2827 \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
   2828 \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
   2829 %
   2830 % Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
   2831 \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
   2832 \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
   2833 \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
   2834 \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
   2835 %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
   2836 \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
   2837 \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
   2838 \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
   2839 \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
   2840 %
   2841 \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
   2842 \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
   2843 \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
   2844 \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
   2845 \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
   2846 %
   2847 \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
   2848 \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
   2849 \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
   2850 \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
   2851 \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
   2852 \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
   2853 \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
   2854 \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
   2855 \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
   2856 \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
   2857 \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
   2858 \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
   2859 \def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
   2860 \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
   2861 \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
   2862 \def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
   2863 \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
   2864 \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
   2865 \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
   2866 \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
   2867 %
   2868 % These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
   2869 \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
   2870 \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
   2871 \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
   2872 \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
   2873 \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
   2874 \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
   2875 \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
   2876 %
   2877 % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
   2878 % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
   2879 % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
   2880 \let\value = \expandablevalue
   2881 %
   2882 \unsepspaces
   2883 % Turn off macro expansion
   2884 \turnoffmacros
   2885 }
   2886 
   2887 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
   2888 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
   2889 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
   2890 {\obeyspaces
   2891  \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
   2892 
   2893 % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
   2894 % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
   2895 \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
   2896 \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
   2897 \def\indexdummydots{...}
   2898 
   2899 \def\indexnofonts{%
   2900 \def\@{@}%
   2901 % how to handle braces?
   2902 \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
   2903 %
   2904 \let\,=\indexdummyfont
   2905 \let\"=\indexdummyfont
   2906 \let\`=\indexdummyfont
   2907 \let\'=\indexdummyfont
   2908 \let\^=\indexdummyfont
   2909 \let\~=\indexdummyfont
   2910 \let\==\indexdummyfont
   2911 \let\b=\indexdummyfont
   2912 \let\c=\indexdummyfont
   2913 \let\d=\indexdummyfont
   2914 \let\u=\indexdummyfont
   2915 \let\v=\indexdummyfont
   2916 \let\H=\indexdummyfont
   2917 \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
   2918 % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
   2919 \def\AA{AA}%
   2920 \def\AE{AE}%
   2921 \def\L{L}%
   2922 \def\OE{OE}%
   2923 \def\O{O}%
   2924 \def\aa{aa}%
   2925 \def\ae{ae}%
   2926 \def\l{l}%
   2927 \def\oe{oe}%
   2928 \def\o{o}%
   2929 \def\ss{ss}%
   2930 %
   2931 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
   2932 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
   2933 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
   2934 %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
   2935 %
   2936 \let\b=\indexdummyfont
   2937 \let\i=\indexdummyfont
   2938 \let\r=\indexdummyfont
   2939 \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
   2940 \let\t=\indexdummyfont
   2941 %
   2942 \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
   2943 \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
   2944 \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
   2945 \let\code=\indexdummyfont
   2946 \let\command=\indexdummyfont
   2947 \let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
   2948 \let\dots=\indexdummydots
   2949 \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
   2950 \let\env=\indexdummyfont
   2951 \let\file=\indexdummyfont
   2952 \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
   2953 \let\key=\indexdummyfont
   2954 \let\math=\indexdummyfont
   2955 \let\option=\indexdummyfont
   2956 \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
   2957 \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
   2958 \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
   2959 \let\url=\indexdummyfont
   2960 \let\var=\indexdummyfont
   2961 \let\w=\indexdummyfont
   2962 }
   2963 
   2964 % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
   2965 % We must first make another character (@) an escape
   2966 % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
   2967 
   2968 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
   2969  @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
   2970 
   2971 \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
   2972 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
   2973 
   2974 % For \ifx comparisons.
   2975 \def\emptymacro{\empty}
   2976 
   2977 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
   2978 %
   2979 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
   2980 
   2981 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
   2982 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
   2983 % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
   2984 % is with defuns, which call us directly.
   2985 %
   2986 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
   2987   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
   2988   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
   2989     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
   2990   \fi
   2991   {%
   2992     \count255=\lastpenalty
   2993     {%
   2994       \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
   2995       \escapechar=`\\
   2996       {%
   2997         \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
   2998         \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
   2999         % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
   3000         %
   3001         \def\thirdarg{#3}%
   3002         %
   3003         % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
   3004         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
   3005           \let\subentry = \empty
   3006         \else
   3007           \def\subentry{ #3}%
   3008         \fi
   3009         %
   3010         % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
   3011         % off to get the string to sort by.
   3012         {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
   3013         %
   3014         % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
   3015         \toks0 = {#2}%
   3016         %
   3017         % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
   3018         % line to write.
   3019         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
   3020           \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
   3021         \fi
   3022         %
   3023         % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
   3024         % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
   3025         % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
   3026         % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
   3027         % sorted result.
   3028         \edef\temp{%
   3029           \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
   3030             \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
   3031         }%
   3032         %
   3033         % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
   3034         % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
   3035         % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
   3036         % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
   3037         % like this:
   3038         % @end defun
   3039         % @tindex whatever
   3040         % @defun ...
   3041         % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
   3042         % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
   3043         % the previous defun.
   3044         %
   3045         % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
   3046         % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
   3047         %
   3048         % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
   3049         %
   3050         \iflinks
   3051           \ifvmode
   3052             \skip0 = \lastskip
   3053             \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
   3054           \fi
   3055           %
   3056           \temp % do the write
   3057           %
   3058           %
   3059           \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
   3060         \fi
   3061       }%
   3062     }%
   3063     \penalty\count255
   3064   }%
   3065 }
   3066 
   3067 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
   3068 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
   3069 % or
   3070 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
   3071 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
   3072 % containing these kinds of lines:
   3073 %  \initial {c}
   3074 %     before the first topic whose initial is c
   3075 %  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
   3076 %     for a topic that is used without subtopics
   3077 %  \primary {topic}
   3078 %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
   3079 %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
   3080 %     for each subtopic.
   3081 
   3082 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
   3083 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
   3084 
   3085 \def\findex {\fnindex}
   3086 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
   3087 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
   3088 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
   3089 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
   3090 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
   3091 
   3092 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
   3093 {\obeylines %
   3094 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
   3095 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
   3096 
   3097 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
   3098 
   3099 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
   3100 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
   3101 %
   3102 \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
   3103 \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
   3104   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
   3105   %
   3106   \smallfonts \rm
   3107   \tolerance = 9500
   3108   \indexbreaks
   3109   %
   3110   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
   3111   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
   3112   % \initial {@}
   3113   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
   3114   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
   3115   \catcode`\@ = 11
   3116   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
   3117   \ifeof 1
   3118     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
   3119     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
   3120     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
   3121     % there is some text.
   3122     \putwordIndexNonexistent
   3123   \else
   3124     %
   3125     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
   3126     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
   3127     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
   3128     \read 1 to \temp
   3129     \ifeof 1
   3130       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
   3131     \else
   3132       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
   3133       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
   3134       % to make right now.
   3135       \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
   3136       \catcode`\\ = 0
   3137       \escapechar = `\\
   3138       \begindoublecolumns
   3139       \input \jobname.#1s
   3140       \enddoublecolumns
   3141     \fi
   3142   \fi
   3143   \closein 1
   3144 \endgroup}
   3145 
   3146 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
   3147 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
   3148 
   3149 \def\initial#1{{%
   3150   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
   3151   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
   3152   %
   3153   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
   3154   \removelastskip
   3155   %
   3156   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
   3157   \penalty -300
   3158   %
   3159   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
   3160   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
   3161   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
   3162   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
   3163   %
   3164   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
   3165   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
   3166   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
   3167   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
   3168   %
   3169   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
   3170   \nobreak
   3171 }}
   3172 
   3173 % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
   3174 % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
   3175 % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
   3176 %
   3177 \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
   3178   %
   3179   % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
   3180   % affect previous text.
   3181   \par
   3182   %
   3183   % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
   3184   \parfillskip = 0in
   3185   %
   3186   % No extra space above this paragraph.
   3187   \parskip = 0in
   3188   %
   3189   % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
   3190   \finalhyphendemerits = 0
   3191   %
   3192   % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
   3193   % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
   3194   % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
   3195   % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
   3196   % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
   3197   %
   3198   % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
   3199   % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
   3200   \hangindent = 2em
   3201   %
   3202   % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
   3203   % with blank space.
   3204   \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
   3205   %
   3206   % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
   3207   \vskip 0pt plus1pt
   3208   %
   3209   % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
   3210   % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
   3211   \noindent
   3212   %
   3213   % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
   3214   #1%
   3215   % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
   3216   % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
   3217   % cursed by a Unix daemon.
   3218   \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
   3219   \def\tempb{#2}%
   3220   \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
   3221   \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
   3222   \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
   3223     %
   3224     % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
   3225     % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
   3226     % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
   3227     \hfil\penalty50
   3228     \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
   3229     %
   3230     % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
   3231     % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
   3232     % \hbox ensues.
   3233     \ifpdf
   3234       \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
   3235     \else
   3236       \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
   3237     \fi
   3238   \fi%
   3239   \par
   3240 \endgroup}
   3241 
   3242 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
   3243 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
   3244   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
   3245 
   3246 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
   3247 
   3248 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
   3249 \def\secondary#1#2{{%
   3250   \parfillskip=0in
   3251   \parskip=0in
   3252   \hangindent=1in
   3253   \hangafter=1
   3254   \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
   3255   \ifpdf
   3256     \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
   3257   \else
   3258     #2
   3259   \fi
   3260   \par
   3261 }}
   3262 
   3263 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
   3264 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
   3265 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
   3266 \catcode`\@=11
   3267 
   3268 \newbox\partialpage
   3269 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
   3270 
   3271 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
   3272   % Grab any single-column material above us.
   3273   \output = {%
   3274     %
   3275     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
   3276     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
   3277     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
   3278     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
   3279     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
   3280     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
   3281     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
   3282     \ifvoid\partialpage \else
   3283       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
   3284     \fi
   3285     %
   3286     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
   3287       % Unvbox the main output page.
   3288       \unvbox\PAGE
   3289       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
   3290     }%
   3291   }%
   3292   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
   3293   %
   3294   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
   3295   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
   3296   %
   3297   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
   3298   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
   3299   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
   3300   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
   3301   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
   3302   %
   3303   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
   3304   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
   3305   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
   3306   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
   3307   % as it did when we hard-coded it.
   3308   %
   3309   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
   3310   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
   3311   % been clobbered.
   3312   %
   3313   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
   3314     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
   3315     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
   3316   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
   3317   %
   3318   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
   3319   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
   3320   \vsize = 2\vsize
   3321 }
   3322 
   3323 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
   3324 % the last.
   3325 %
   3326 \def\doublecolumnout{%
   3327   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
   3328   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
   3329   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
   3330   % previous page.
   3331   \dimen@ = \vsize
   3332   \divide\dimen@ by 2
   3333   \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
   3334   %
   3335   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
   3336   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
   3337   \onepageout\pagesofar
   3338   \unvbox255
   3339   \penalty\outputpenalty
   3340 }
   3341 %
   3342 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
   3343 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
   3344 \def\pagesofar{%
   3345   \unvbox\partialpage
   3346   %
   3347   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
   3348   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
   3349   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
   3350 }
   3351 % 
   3352 % All done with double columns.
   3353 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
   3354   \output = {%
   3355     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
   3356     % current page, no automatic page break.
   3357     \balancecolumns
   3358     %
   3359     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
   3360     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
   3361     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
   3362     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
   3363     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
   3364     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
   3365     % the output somewhat more palatable.)
   3366     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
   3367   }%
   3368   \eject
   3369   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
   3370   %
   3371   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
   3372   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
   3373   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
   3374   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
   3375   \pagegoal = \vsize
   3376 }
   3377 %
   3378 % Called at the end of the double column material.
   3379 \def\balancecolumns{%
   3380   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
   3381   \dimen@ = \ht0
   3382   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
   3383   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
   3384   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
   3385   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
   3386   \splittopskip = \topskip
   3387   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
   3388   {%
   3389     \vbadness = 10000
   3390     \loop
   3391       \global\setbox3 = \copy0
   3392       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
   3393     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
   3394       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
   3395     \repeat
   3396   }%
   3397   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
   3398   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
   3399   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
   3400   %
   3401   \pagesofar
   3402 }
   3403 \catcode`\@ = \other
   3404 
   3405 
   3406 \message{sectioning,}
   3407 % Chapters, sections, etc.
   3408 
   3409 \newcount\chapno
   3410 \newcount\secno        \secno=0
   3411 \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
   3412 \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
   3413 
   3414 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
   3415 \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
   3416 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
   3417 % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
   3418 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
   3419 \def\appendixletter{%
   3420   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
   3421   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
   3422   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
   3423   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
   3424   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
   3425   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
   3426   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
   3427   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
   3428   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
   3429   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
   3430   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
   3431   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
   3432   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
   3433   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
   3434   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
   3435   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
   3436   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
   3437   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
   3438   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
   3439   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
   3440   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
   3441   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
   3442   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
   3443   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
   3444   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
   3445   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
   3446   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
   3447   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
   3448   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
   3449   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
   3450   \else\char\the\appendixno
   3451   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
   3452   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
   3453 
   3454 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
   3455 % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
   3456 \def\thischapter{}
   3457 \def\thissection{}
   3458 
   3459 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
   3460 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
   3461 
   3462 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
   3463 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
   3464 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
   3465 
   3466 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
   3467 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
   3468 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
   3469 
   3470 % Choose a numbered-heading macro
   3471 % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
   3472 % #2 is text for heading
   3473 \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
   3474 \ifcase\absseclevel
   3475   \chapterzzz{#2}
   3476 \or
   3477   \seczzz{#2}
   3478 \or
   3479   \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
   3480 \or
   3481   \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
   3482 \else
   3483   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
   3484     \chapterzzz{#2}
   3485   \else
   3486     \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
   3487   \fi
   3488 \fi
   3489 }
   3490 
   3491 % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
   3492 \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
   3493 \ifcase\absseclevel
   3494   \appendixzzz{#2}
   3495 \or
   3496   \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
   3497 \or
   3498   \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
   3499 \or
   3500   \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
   3501 \else
   3502   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
   3503     \appendixzzz{#2}
   3504   \else
   3505     \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
   3506   \fi
   3507 \fi
   3508 }
   3509 
   3510 % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
   3511 \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
   3512 \ifcase\absseclevel
   3513   \unnumberedzzz{#2}
   3514 \or
   3515   \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
   3516 \or
   3517   \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
   3518 \or
   3519   \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
   3520 \else
   3521   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
   3522     \unnumberedzzz{#2}
   3523   \else
   3524     \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
   3525   \fi
   3526 \fi
   3527 }
   3528 
   3529 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
   3530 \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
   3531 \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
   3532 \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
   3533 \def\chapterzzz #1{%
   3534 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
   3535 \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
   3536 \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
   3537 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
   3538 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
   3539 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
   3540 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
   3541 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
   3542 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3543 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
   3544                                   {\the\chapno}}}%
   3545 \temp
   3546 \donoderef
   3547 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
   3548 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
   3549 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
   3550 }
   3551 
   3552 \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
   3553 \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
   3554 \def\appendixzzz #1{%
   3555 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
   3556 \global\advance \appendixno by 1
   3557 \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
   3558 \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
   3559 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
   3560 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
   3561 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
   3562 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3563 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
   3564                        {\appendixletter}}}%
   3565 \temp
   3566 \appendixnoderef
   3567 \global\let\section = \appendixsec
   3568 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
   3569 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
   3570 }
   3571 
   3572 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
   3573 \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
   3574 \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
   3575 
   3576 % @top is like @unnumbered.
   3577 \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
   3578 
   3579 \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
   3580 \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
   3581 \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
   3582 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
   3583 %
   3584 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
   3585 % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
   3586 % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
   3587 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
   3588 % to be executed, not expanded).
   3589 %
   3590 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
   3591 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
   3592 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
   3593 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
   3594 % the toc entries.)
   3595 \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
   3596 %
   3597 \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
   3598 \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
   3599 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3600 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
   3601 \temp
   3602 \unnumbnoderef
   3603 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
   3604 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
   3605 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
   3606 }
   3607 
   3608 % Sections.
   3609 \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
   3610 \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
   3611 \def\seczzz #1{%
   3612 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
   3613 \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
   3614 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3615 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
   3616                                   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
   3617 \temp
   3618 \donoderef
   3619 \nobreak
   3620 }
   3621 
   3622 \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
   3623 \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
   3624 \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
   3625 \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
   3626 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
   3627 \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
   3628 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3629 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
   3630                                   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
   3631 \temp
   3632 \appendixnoderef
   3633 \nobreak
   3634 }
   3635 
   3636 \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
   3637 \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
   3638 \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
   3639 \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
   3640 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3641 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
   3642   {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
   3643 \temp
   3644 \unnumbnoderef
   3645 \nobreak
   3646 }
   3647 
   3648 % Subsections.
   3649 \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
   3650 \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
   3651 \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
   3652 \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
   3653 \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
   3654 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3655 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
   3656                                     {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
   3657 \temp
   3658 \donoderef
   3659 \nobreak
   3660 }
   3661 
   3662 \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
   3663 \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
   3664 \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
   3665 \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
   3666 \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
   3667 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3668 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
   3669                                 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
   3670 \temp
   3671 \appendixnoderef
   3672 \nobreak
   3673 }
   3674 
   3675 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
   3676 \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
   3677 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
   3678 \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
   3679 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3680 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
   3681   {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
   3682 \temp
   3683 \unnumbnoderef
   3684 \nobreak
   3685 }
   3686 
   3687 % Subsubsections.
   3688 \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
   3689 \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
   3690 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
   3691 \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
   3692 \subsubsecheading {#1}
   3693   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
   3694 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3695 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
   3696   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
   3697 \temp
   3698 \donoderef
   3699 \nobreak
   3700 }
   3701 
   3702 \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
   3703 \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
   3704 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
   3705 \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
   3706 \subsubsecheading {#1}
   3707   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
   3708 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3709 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
   3710   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
   3711 \temp
   3712 \appendixnoderef
   3713 \nobreak
   3714 }
   3715 
   3716 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
   3717 \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
   3718 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
   3719 \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
   3720 \toks0 = {#1}%
   3721 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
   3722   {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
   3723 \temp
   3724 \unnumbnoderef
   3725 \nobreak
   3726 }
   3727 
   3728 % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
   3729 % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
   3730 \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
   3731 \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
   3732 \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
   3733 \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
   3734 \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
   3735 
   3736 \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
   3737 \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
   3738 \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
   3739 \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
   3740 
   3741 \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
   3742 \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
   3743 \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
   3744 \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
   3745 
   3746 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
   3747 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
   3748 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
   3749 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
   3750 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
   3751 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
   3752 
   3753 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
   3754 
   3755 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
   3756 %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
   3757 %          overlong headings to fold.
   3758 %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
   3759 %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
   3760 %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
   3761 %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
   3762 
   3763 
   3764 \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
   3765 \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
   3766 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
   3767 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
   3768                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
   3769                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
   3770 
   3771 \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
   3772 \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
   3773 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
   3774                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
   3775                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
   3776 
   3777 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
   3778 \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
   3779 \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
   3780 \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
   3781 
   3782 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
   3783 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
   3784 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
   3785 
   3786 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
   3787 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
   3788 
   3789 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
   3790 
   3791 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
   3792 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
   3793 
   3794 \newskip\chapheadingskip
   3795 
   3796 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
   3797 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
   3798 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
   3799 
   3800 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
   3801 
   3802 \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
   3803 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
   3804 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
   3805 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
   3806 
   3807 \def\CHAPPAGon{%
   3808 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
   3809 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
   3810 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
   3811 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
   3812 
   3813 \def\CHAPPAGodd{
   3814 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
   3815 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
   3816 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
   3817 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
   3818 
   3819 \CHAPPAGon
   3820 
   3821 \def\CHAPFplain{
   3822 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
   3823 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
   3824 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
   3825 
   3826 % Plain chapter opening.
   3827 % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
   3828 \def\chfplain#1#2{%
   3829   \pchapsepmacro
   3830   {%
   3831     \chapfonts \rm
   3832     \def\chapnum{#2}%
   3833     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
   3834     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
   3835           \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
   3836           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
   3837   }%
   3838   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
   3839   \nobreak
   3840 }
   3841 
   3842 % Plain opening for unnumbered.
   3843 \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
   3844 
   3845 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
   3846 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
   3847 \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
   3848   \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
   3849     \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
   3850     \leftskip = \rightskip
   3851     \parfillskip = 0pt
   3852   }%
   3853   \chfplain{#1}{}%
   3854 }}
   3855 
   3856 \CHAPFplain % The default
   3857 
   3858 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
   3859 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
   3860                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
   3861                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
   3862 }
   3863 
   3864 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
   3865 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
   3866 \par\penalty 5000 %
   3867 }
   3868 
   3869 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
   3870 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
   3871                        \parindent=0pt
   3872                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
   3873 }
   3874 
   3875 \def\CHAPFopen{
   3876 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
   3877 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
   3878 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
   3879 
   3880 
   3881 % Section titles.
   3882 \newskip\secheadingskip
   3883 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
   3884 \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
   3885 \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
   3886 
   3887 % Subsection titles.
   3888 \newskip \subsecheadingskip
   3889 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
   3890 \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
   3891 \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
   3892 
   3893 % Subsubsection titles.
   3894 \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
   3895 \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
   3896 \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
   3897 \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
   3898 
   3899 
   3900 % Print any size section title.
   3901 %
   3902 % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
   3903 % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
   3904 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
   3905   {%
   3906     \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
   3907     \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
   3908   }%
   3909   {%
   3910     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
   3911     \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
   3912     %
   3913     % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
   3914     \def\secnum{#2}%
   3915     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
   3916     %
   3917     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
   3918           \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
   3919           \unhbox0 #3}%
   3920   }%
   3921   \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
   3922 }
   3923 
   3924 
   3925 \message{toc,}
   3926 % Table of contents.
   3927 \newwrite\tocfile
   3928 
   3929 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
   3930 % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
   3931 % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
   3932 %
   3933 % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
   3934 % fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
   3935 %
   3936 \newif\iftocfileopened
   3937 \def\writetocentry#1{%
   3938   \iftocfileopened\else
   3939     \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
   3940     \global\tocfileopenedtrue
   3941   \fi
   3942   \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
   3943   %
   3944   % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
   3945   % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
   3946   % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
   3947   % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
   3948   % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
   3949   % two named `2'.
   3950   \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
   3951 }
   3952 
   3953 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
   3954 \newcount\savepageno
   3955 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
   3956 
   3957 % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
   3958 % to \tocfile.
   3959 %
   3960 \def\startcontents#1{%
   3961    % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
   3962    % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
   3963    % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
   3964    % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege (a] matematik.su.se>
   3965    \contentsalignmacro
   3966    \immediate\closeout\tocfile
   3967    %
   3968    % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
   3969    % It is abundantly clear what they are.
   3970    \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
   3971    \savepageno = \pageno
   3972    \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
   3973       \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
   3974       % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
   3975       % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
   3976       %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha (a] piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
   3977       \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
   3978       \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
   3979       %
   3980       % Roman numerals for page numbers.
   3981       \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
   3982 }
   3983 
   3984 
   3985 % Normal (long) toc.
   3986 \def\contents{%
   3987    \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
   3988      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
   3989      \ifeof 1 \else
   3990        \closein 1
   3991        \input \jobname.toc
   3992      \fi
   3993      \vfill \eject
   3994      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
   3995      \pdfmakeoutlines
   3996    \endgroup
   3997    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
   3998    \pageno = \savepageno
   3999 }
   4000 
   4001 % And just the chapters.
   4002 \def\summarycontents{%
   4003    \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
   4004       %
   4005       \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
   4006       \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
   4007       \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
   4008       % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
   4009       \secfonts
   4010       \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
   4011       \rm
   4012       \hyphenpenalty = 10000
   4013       \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
   4014       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
   4015       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
   4016       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
   4017       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
   4018       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
   4019       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
   4020       \openin 1 \jobname.toc
   4021       \ifeof 1 \else
   4022         \closein 1
   4023         \input \jobname.toc
   4024       \fi
   4025      \vfill \eject
   4026      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
   4027    \endgroup
   4028    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
   4029    \pageno = \savepageno
   4030 }
   4031 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
   4032 
   4033 \ifpdf
   4034   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
   4035 \fi
   4036 
   4037 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
   4038 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
   4039 % The last argument is the page number.
   4040 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
   4041 
   4042 % Chapters, in the main contents.
   4043 \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
   4044 %
   4045 % Chapters, in the short toc.
   4046 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
   4047 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
   4048   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
   4049 }
   4050 
   4051 % Appendices, in the main contents.
   4052 \def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
   4053 %
   4054 % Appendices, in the short toc.
   4055 \let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
   4056 
   4057 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
   4058 % The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
   4059 % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
   4060 % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
   4061 % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
   4062 %
   4063 \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
   4064 %
   4065 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
   4066   % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
   4067   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
   4068   % But use \hss just in case.
   4069   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
   4070   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
   4071   \dimen0 = 1em
   4072   \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
   4073 }
   4074 
   4075 % Unnumbered chapters.
   4076 \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
   4077 \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
   4078 
   4079 % Sections.
   4080 \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
   4081 \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
   4082 
   4083 % Subsections.
   4084 \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
   4085 \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
   4086 
   4087 % And subsubsections.
   4088 \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
   4089   \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
   4090 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
   4091 
   4092 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
   4093 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
   4094 
   4095 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
   4096 % page number.
   4097 %
   4098 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
   4099 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
   4100 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
   4101    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
   4102    \begingroup
   4103      \chapentryfonts
   4104      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
   4105    \endgroup
   4106    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
   4107 }
   4108 
   4109 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
   4110   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
   4111   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
   4112 \endgroup}
   4113 
   4114 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
   4115   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
   4116   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
   4117 \endgroup}
   4118 
   4119 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
   4120   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
   4121   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
   4122 \endgroup}
   4123 
   4124 % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
   4125 % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
   4126 % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
   4127 % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
   4128 \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
   4129   \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
   4130   % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
   4131   % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
   4132   % have to do the usual translation tricks.
   4133   \entry{#1}{#2}%
   4134 \endgroup}
   4135 
   4136 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
   4137 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
   4138 
   4139 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
   4140 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
   4141 
   4142 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
   4143 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
   4144 \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
   4145 \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
   4146 
   4147 
   4148 \message{environments,}
   4149 % @foo ... @end foo.
   4150 
   4151 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
   4152 % 
   4153 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
   4154 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
   4155 %
   4156 \def\point{$\star$}
   4157 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
   4158 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
   4159 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
   4160 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
   4161 
   4162 % The @error{} command.
   4163 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
   4164 % 
   4165 \newbox\errorbox
   4166 %
   4167 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
   4168 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
   4169 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
   4170 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
   4171 %
   4172 \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
   4173    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
   4174    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
   4175    \vbox{
   4176       \hrule height\dimen2
   4177       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
   4178          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
   4179          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
   4180       \hrule height\dimen2}
   4181     \hfil}
   4182 %
   4183 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
   4184 
   4185 % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
   4186 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
   4187 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
   4188 
   4189 \def\tex{\begingroup
   4190   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
   4191   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
   4192   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
   4193   \catcode `\%=14
   4194   \catcode 43=12 % plus
   4195   \catcode`\"=12
   4196   \catcode`\==12
   4197   \catcode`\|=12
   4198   \catcode`\<=12
   4199   \catcode`\>=12
   4200   \escapechar=`\\
   4201   %
   4202   \let\b=\ptexb
   4203   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
   4204   \let\c=\ptexc
   4205   \let\,=\ptexcomma
   4206   \let\.=\ptexdot
   4207   \let\dots=\ptexdots
   4208   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
   4209   \let\!=\ptexexclam
   4210   \let\i=\ptexi
   4211   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
   4212   \let\+=\tabalign
   4213   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
   4214   \let\*=\ptexstar
   4215   \let\t=\ptext
   4216   %
   4217   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
   4218   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
   4219   \def\@{@}%
   4220 \let\Etex=\endgroup}
   4221 
   4222 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
   4223 % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
   4224 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
   4225 
   4226 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
   4227 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
   4228 
   4229 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
   4230 % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
   4231 % have any width.
   4232 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
   4233 
   4234 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
   4235 % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
   4236 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
   4237 % should produce a line of output anyway.
   4238 %
   4239 {\obeyspaces %
   4240 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
   4241 
   4242 % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
   4243 % for use in \parsearg.
   4244 {\sepspaces%
   4245 \global\let\obeyedspace= }
   4246 
   4247 % This space is always present above and below environments.
   4248 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
   4249 
   4250 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
   4251 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
   4252 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
   4253 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
   4254 %
   4255 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
   4256   \ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
   4257     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
   4258     \endgraf
   4259     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
   4260       \removelastskip
   4261       \penalty-50
   4262       \vskip\envskipamount
   4263     \fi
   4264   \fi
   4265 }}
   4266 
   4267 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
   4268 
   4269 % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
   4270 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
   4271 
   4272 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
   4273 % environment contents.
   4274 \font\circle=lcircle10
   4275 \newdimen\circthick
   4276 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
   4277 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
   4278 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
   4279 %
   4280 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
   4281 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
   4282 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
   4283 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
   4284 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
   4285         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
   4286         \hskip\rskip}}
   4287 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
   4288         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
   4289         \hskip\rskip}}
   4290 %
   4291 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
   4292 
   4293 \long\def\cartouche{%
   4294 \begingroup
   4295         \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
   4296         \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
   4297         \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
   4298                           \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
   4299         \cartouter=\hsize
   4300         \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
   4301 %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
   4302 %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
   4303         \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
   4304         % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
   4305         \let\nonarrowing=\comment
   4306         \vbox\bgroup
   4307                 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
   4308                 \carttop
   4309                 \hbox\bgroup
   4310                         \hskip\lskip
   4311                         \vrule\kern3pt
   4312                         \vbox\bgroup
   4313                                 \hsize=\cartinner
   4314                                 \kern3pt
   4315                                 \begingroup
   4316                                         \baselineskip=\normbskip
   4317                                         \lineskip=\normlskip
   4318                                         \parskip=\normpskip
   4319                                         \vskip -\parskip
   4320 \def\Ecartouche{%
   4321                                 \endgroup
   4322                                 \kern3pt
   4323                         \egroup
   4324                         \kern3pt\vrule
   4325                         \hskip\rskip
   4326                 \egroup
   4327                 \cartbot
   4328         \egroup
   4329 \endgroup
   4330 }}
   4331 
   4332 
   4333 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
   4334 % inside a group.
   4335 \def\nonfillstart{%
   4336   \aboveenvbreak
   4337   \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
   4338   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
   4339   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
   4340   \singlespace
   4341   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
   4342   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
   4343   \parskip = 0pt
   4344   \parindent = 0pt
   4345   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
   4346   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
   4347   % at next level down.
   4348   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
   4349     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
   4350     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
   4351     \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
   4352     \let\nonarrowing=\relax
   4353   \fi
   4354 }
   4355 
   4356 % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
   4357 % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
   4358 %
   4359 % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
   4360 % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
   4361 % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
   4362 % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
   4363 % the environment.
   4364 %
   4365 \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
   4366 
   4367 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
   4368 \def\lisp{\begingroup
   4369   \nonfillstart
   4370   \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
   4371   \tt
   4372   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
   4373   \gobble       % eat return
   4374 }
   4375 
   4376 % @example: Same as @lisp.
   4377 \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
   4378 
   4379 % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
   4380 % redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
   4381 % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
   4382 % whatever) command.
   4383 %
   4384 % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
   4385 % @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
   4386 %
   4387 \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
   4388 \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
   4389 \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
   4390 \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
   4391 
   4392 % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
   4393 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
   4394 \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
   4395   \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
   4396   \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
   4397   \smallexamplefonts
   4398   \lisp
   4399 }
   4400 
   4401 % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
   4402 %
   4403 \def\display{\begingroup
   4404   \nonfillstart
   4405   \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
   4406   \gobble
   4407 }
   4408 %
   4409 % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
   4410 %
   4411 \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
   4412   \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
   4413   \smallexamplefonts \rm
   4414   \display
   4415 }
   4416 
   4417 % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
   4418 %
   4419 \def\format{\begingroup
   4420   \let\nonarrowing = t
   4421   \nonfillstart
   4422   \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
   4423   \gobble
   4424 }
   4425 %
   4426 % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
   4427 %
   4428 \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
   4429   \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
   4430   \smallexamplefonts \rm
   4431   \format
   4432 }
   4433 
   4434 % @flushleft (same as @format).
   4435 %
   4436 \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
   4437 
   4438 % @flushright.
   4439 %
   4440 \def\flushright{\begingroup
   4441   \let\nonarrowing = t
   4442   \nonfillstart
   4443   \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
   4444   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
   4445   \gobble
   4446 }
   4447 
   4448 
   4449 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
   4450 % and narrows the margins.
   4451 %
   4452 \def\quotation{%
   4453   \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
   4454   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
   4455   \singlespace
   4456   \parindent=0pt
   4457   % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
   4458   % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
   4459   \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
   4460   %
   4461   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
   4462   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
   4463     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
   4464     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
   4465     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
   4466     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   4467   \fi
   4468 }
   4469 
   4470 
   4471 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
   4472 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 
   4473 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
   4474 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke (a] gnu.org
   4475 %
   4476 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
   4477 %
   4478 % [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
   4479 \def\dospecials{%
   4480   \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
   4481   \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
   4482 %
   4483 % [Knuth] p. 380
   4484 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
   4485   \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
   4486 %
   4487 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
   4488 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
   4489 \begingroup
   4490   \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
   4491 \endgroup
   4492 %
   4493 % Setup for the @verb command.
   4494 %
   4495 % Eight spaces for a tab
   4496 \begingroup
   4497   \catcode`\^^I=\active
   4498   \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
   4499 \endgroup
   4500 %
   4501 \def\setupverb{%
   4502   \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
   4503   \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
   4504   \catcode`\`=\active
   4505   \tabeightspaces
   4506   % Respect line breaks,
   4507   % print special symbols as themselves, and
   4508   % make each space count
   4509   % must do in this order:
   4510   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
   4511 }
   4512 
   4513 % Setup for the @verbatim environment
   4514 %
   4515 % Real tab expansion
   4516 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
   4517 %
   4518 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
   4519 \begingroup
   4520   \catcode`\^^I=\active
   4521   \gdef\tabexpand{%
   4522     \catcode`\^^I=\active
   4523     \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
   4524       \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
   4525       \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
   4526       \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
   4527       \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
   4528       \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
   4529     }%
   4530   }
   4531 \endgroup
   4532 \def\setupverbatim{%
   4533   % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
   4534   \tt
   4535   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
   4536   \catcode`\`=\active
   4537   \tabexpand
   4538   % Respect line breaks,
   4539   % print special symbols as themselves, and
   4540   % make each space count
   4541   % must do in this order:
   4542   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
   4543   \everypar{\starttabbox}%
   4544 }
   4545 
   4546 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 
   4547 % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a 
   4548 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
   4549 %
   4550 %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
   4551 %
   4552 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
   4553 \begingroup
   4554   \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
   4555   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
   4556 \endgroup
   4557 %
   4558 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
   4559 %
   4560 %
   4561 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
   4562 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
   4563 %
   4564 %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
   4565 %
   4566 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 
   4567 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
   4568 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
   4569 %
   4570 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
   4571 %% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
   4572 %% \begingroup
   4573 %% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
   4574 %% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
   4575 %% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
   4576 %% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
   4577 %% |endgroup
   4578 \begingroup
   4579   \catcode`\ =\active
   4580   \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
   4581 \endgroup
   4582 %
   4583 \def\verbatim{%
   4584   \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
   4585   \begingroup
   4586     \nonfillstart
   4587     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
   4588     \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
   4589 }
   4590 
   4591 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
   4592 %
   4593 % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
   4594 \def\verbatiminclude{%
   4595   \begingroup
   4596     \catcode`\\=12
   4597     \catcode`~=12
   4598     \catcode`^=12
   4599     \catcode`_=12
   4600     \catcode`|=12
   4601     \catcode`<=12
   4602     \catcode`>=12
   4603     \catcode`+=12
   4604     \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
   4605 }
   4606 \def\setupverbatiminclude{%
   4607   \begingroup
   4608     \nonfillstart
   4609     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
   4610     \begingroup\setupverbatim
   4611 }
   4612 %
   4613 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
   4614      % Restore active chars for included file.
   4615   \endgroup
   4616   \begingroup
   4617   \def\thisfile{#1}%
   4618   \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
   4619   \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
   4620 }
   4621 
   4622 % @copying ... @end copying.
   4623 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
   4624 % 
   4625 \newbox\copyingbox
   4626 %
   4627 \def\copying{\begingroup
   4628   \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
   4629   \def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
   4630   \global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
   4631 }
   4632 
   4633 % @insertcopying.
   4634 % 
   4635 \def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
   4636 
   4637 
   4638 \message{defuns,}
   4639 % @defun etc.
   4640 
   4641 % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
   4642 \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
   4643 
   4644 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
   4645 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
   4646 \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
   4647 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
   4648 
   4649 \newcount\parencount
   4650 % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
   4651 % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
   4652 \def\activeparens{%
   4653 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
   4654 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
   4655 
   4656 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
   4657 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
   4658 
   4659 {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
   4660 
   4661 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
   4662 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
   4663 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
   4664 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
   4665 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
   4666 
   4667 \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
   4668 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
   4669 % This is used to turn on special parens
   4670 % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
   4671 \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
   4672 
   4673 % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
   4674 % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
   4675 \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
   4676   \global\advance\parencount by 1
   4677 }
   4678 %
   4679 % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
   4680 \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
   4681 %
   4682 \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
   4683   % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
   4684   \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
   4685   \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
   4686 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
   4687 \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
   4688 %
   4689 \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
   4690 } % End of definition inside \activeparens
   4691 %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
   4692 %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
   4693 \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
   4694 \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
   4695 \let\ampnr = \&
   4696 \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
   4697 \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
   4698 
   4699 % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
   4700 {
   4701   \catcode`& = 13
   4702   \global\let& = \ampnr
   4703 }
   4704 
   4705 % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
   4706 % #1 should be the function name.
   4707 % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
   4708 
   4709 \def\defname #1#2{%
   4710 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
   4711 % outside the @def...
   4712 \dimen2=\leftskip
   4713 \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
   4714 \noindent
   4715 \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
   4716 \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
   4717 \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
   4718 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
   4719 % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
   4720 % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
   4721 % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
   4722 {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
   4723 % so that \rightline will obey them.
   4724 \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
   4725 \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
   4726 % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
   4727 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
   4728 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
   4729 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4730 {\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
   4731 }
   4732 
   4733 % Actually process the body of a definition
   4734 % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
   4735 % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
   4736 % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
   4737 %    such as \defunheader.
   4738 
   4739 \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
   4740 \medbreak %
   4741 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
   4742 % so that it will exit this group.
   4743 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4744 \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
   4745 \parindent=0in
   4746 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4747 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4748 \begingroup %
   4749 \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
   4750 \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
   4751 
   4752 % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
   4753 % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
   4754 % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
   4755 % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
   4756 %
   4757 \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
   4758 \medbreak %
   4759 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
   4760 % so that it will exit this group.
   4761 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4762 \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
   4763 \parindent=0in
   4764 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4765 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4766 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
   4767 
   4768 % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
   4769 % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
   4770 % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
   4771 % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
   4772 % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
   4773 % #5 is the method's return type.
   4774 %
   4775 \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
   4776   \medbreak
   4777   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4778   \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
   4779   \parindent=0in
   4780   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4781   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4782   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
   4783 
   4784 % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
   4785 % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
   4786 % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
   4787 % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
   4788 % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
   4789 % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
   4790 % 
   4791 \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
   4792   \medbreak
   4793   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4794   \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
   4795     \def#4{##1}%
   4796     \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
   4797   \parindent=0in
   4798   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4799   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4800   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
   4801 
   4802 \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
   4803 \medbreak %
   4804 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
   4805 % so that it will exit this group.
   4806 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4807 \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
   4808 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
   4809 \parindent=0in
   4810 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4811 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4812 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
   4813 
   4814 % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
   4815 % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
   4816 % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
   4817 
   4818 \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
   4819 \medbreak %
   4820 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
   4821 % so that it will exit this group.
   4822 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4823 \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
   4824 \parindent=0in
   4825 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4826 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4827 \begingroup %
   4828 \catcode 61=\active %
   4829 \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
   4830 
   4831 % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
   4832 % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
   4833 %
   4834 \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
   4835   \begingroup\inENV %
   4836   \medbreak %
   4837   % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
   4838   % so that it will exit this group.
   4839   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4840   \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
   4841   \parindent=0in
   4842   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4843   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4844   \begingroup\obeylines
   4845 }
   4846 
   4847 \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
   4848   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
   4849   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
   4850 }
   4851 
   4852 % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
   4853 % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
   4854 % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
   4855 % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
   4856 %
   4857 % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
   4858 % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
   4859 % won't strip off the braces.
   4860 %
   4861 \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
   4862   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
   4863   \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
   4864 }
   4865 
   4866 % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
   4867 % braces (if any).  That's what this does.
   4868 %
   4869 \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
   4870 
   4871 % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
   4872 % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
   4873 % (which might be empty) the arguments.
   4874 %
   4875 \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
   4876   #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
   4877 }%
   4878 
   4879 \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
   4880 \medbreak %
   4881 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
   4882 % so that it will exit this group.
   4883 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
   4884 \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
   4885 \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
   4886 \parindent=0in
   4887 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   4888 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
   4889 \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
   4890 
   4891 % Split up #2 at the first space token.
   4892 % call #1 with two arguments:
   4893 %  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
   4894 %  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
   4895 % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
   4896 % and the second is passed as empty.
   4897 
   4898 {\obeylines
   4899 \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
   4900 \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
   4901 \ifx\relax #3%
   4902 #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
   4903 
   4904 % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
   4905 
   4906 % Define @defun.
   4907 
   4908 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
   4909 % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
   4910 
   4911 \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
   4912 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
   4913 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
   4914 % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
   4915 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
   4916 #1%
   4917 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
   4918 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
   4919 \interlinepenalty=10000
   4920 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
   4921 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
   4922 }
   4923 
   4924 \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
   4925 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
   4926 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
   4927 % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
   4928 \boldbraxnoamp
   4929 \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
   4930 \interlinepenalty=10000
   4931 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
   4932 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
   4933 }
   4934 
   4935 % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
   4936 
   4937 % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
   4938 
   4939 \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
   4940 
   4941 \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
   4942 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
   4943 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
   4944 }
   4945 
   4946 % @defun == @deffn Function
   4947 
   4948 \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
   4949 
   4950 \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
   4951 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
   4952 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
   4953 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
   4954 }
   4955 
   4956 % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
   4957 
   4958 \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
   4959 
   4960 % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
   4961 \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
   4962 % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
   4963 \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
   4964 \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
   4965 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
   4966 \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
   4967 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
   4968 }
   4969 
   4970 % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
   4971 
   4972 \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
   4973 
   4974 % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
   4975 % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
   4976 \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
   4977 
   4978 % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
   4979 \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
   4980 % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
   4981 \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
   4982 \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
   4983 \begingroup
   4984 \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
   4985 %               at least some C++ text from working
   4986 \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
   4987 \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
   4988 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
   4989 }
   4990 
   4991 % @defmac == @deffn Macro
   4992 
   4993 \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
   4994 
   4995 \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
   4996 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
   4997 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
   4998 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
   4999 }
   5000 
   5001 % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
   5002 
   5003 \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
   5004 
   5005 \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
   5006 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
   5007 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
   5008 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
   5009 }
   5010 
   5011 % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
   5012 %
   5013 \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
   5014 \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
   5015 %
   5016 \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
   5017 \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
   5018 \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
   5019 \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
   5020 }
   5021 
   5022 % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
   5023 %
   5024 \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
   5025   \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
   5026                        \deftypeopcategory}
   5027 %
   5028 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
   5029 \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
   5030   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
   5031   \begingroup
   5032     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
   5033             {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
   5034     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
   5035   \endgroup
   5036 }
   5037 
   5038 % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
   5039 %
   5040 \def\deftypemethod{%
   5041   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
   5042 %
   5043 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
   5044 \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
   5045   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
   5046   \begingroup
   5047     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
   5048     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
   5049   \endgroup
   5050 }
   5051 
   5052 % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
   5053 %
   5054 \def\deftypeivar{%
   5055   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
   5056 %
   5057 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
   5058 \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
   5059   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
   5060   \begingroup
   5061     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
   5062             {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
   5063     \defvarargs{#3}%
   5064   \endgroup
   5065 }
   5066 
   5067 % @defmethod == @defop Method
   5068 %
   5069 \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
   5070 %
   5071 % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
   5072 \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
   5073   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
   5074   \begingroup
   5075     \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
   5076     \defunargs{#3}%
   5077   \endgroup
   5078 }
   5079 
   5080 % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
   5081 
   5082 \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
   5083 \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
   5084 
   5085 \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
   5086 \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
   5087 \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
   5088 \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
   5089 }
   5090 
   5091 % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
   5092 %
   5093 \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
   5094 %
   5095 \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
   5096   \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
   5097   \begingroup
   5098     \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
   5099     \defvarargs{#3}%
   5100   \endgroup
   5101 }
   5102 
   5103 % @defvar
   5104 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
   5105 % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
   5106 % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
   5107 \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
   5108 \interlinepenalty=10000
   5109 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
   5110 
   5111 % @defvr Counter foo-count
   5112 
   5113 \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
   5114 
   5115 \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
   5116 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
   5117 
   5118 % @defvar == @defvr Variable
   5119 
   5120 \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
   5121 
   5122 \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
   5123 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
   5124 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
   5125 }
   5126 
   5127 % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
   5128 
   5129 \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
   5130 
   5131 \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
   5132 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
   5133 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
   5134 }
   5135 
   5136 % @deftypevar int foobar
   5137 
   5138 \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
   5139 
   5140 % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
   5141 % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
   5142 \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
   5143 \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
   5144 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
   5145 \interlinepenalty=10000
   5146 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
   5147 \endgroup}
   5148 \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
   5149 
   5150 % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
   5151 
   5152 \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
   5153 
   5154 \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
   5155 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
   5156 \interlinepenalty=10000
   5157 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
   5158 \endgroup}
   5159 
   5160 % Now define @deftp
   5161 % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
   5162 
   5163 \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
   5164 
   5165 % @deftp Class window height width ...
   5166 
   5167 \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
   5168 
   5169 \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
   5170 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
   5171 
   5172 % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
   5173 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
   5174 % 
   5175 \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
   5176 \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
   5177 \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
   5178 \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
   5179 \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
   5180 \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
   5181 \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
   5182 \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
   5183 \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
   5184 \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
   5185 \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
   5186 \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
   5187 \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
   5188 \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
   5189 \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
   5190 \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
   5191 \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
   5192 \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
   5193 \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
   5194 
   5195 
   5196 \message{macros,}
   5197 % @macro.
   5198 
   5199 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
   5200 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
   5201 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
   5202  \newwrite\macscribble
   5203  \def\scanmacro#1{%
   5204    \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
   5205    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
   5206    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
   5207    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
   5208    \toks0={#1\endinput}%
   5209    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
   5210    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
   5211    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
   5212    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
   5213    \input \jobname.tmp
   5214    \endgroup
   5215 }
   5216 \else
   5217 \def\scanmacro#1{%
   5218 \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
   5219 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
   5220 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
   5221 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
   5222 \fi
   5223 
   5224 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
   5225 \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
   5226 \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
   5227 \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
   5228                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
   5229 
   5230 % Utility routines.
   5231 % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
   5232 \def\cslet#1#2{%
   5233 \expandafter\expandafter
   5234 \expandafter\let
   5235 \expandafter\expandafter
   5236 \csname#1\endcsname
   5237 \csname#2\endcsname}
   5238 
   5239 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
   5240 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
   5241 {\catcode`\@=11
   5242 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
   5243 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
   5244 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
   5245 \def\unbrace#1{#1}
   5246 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
   5247 }
   5248 
   5249 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
   5250 {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
   5251 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
   5252 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
   5253 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
   5254 }
   5255 
   5256 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
   5257 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
   5258 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
   5259 
   5260 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
   5261 % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
   5262 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
   5263 
   5264 \def\macrobodyctxt{%
   5265   \catcode`\~=12
   5266   \catcode`\^=12
   5267   \catcode`\_=12
   5268   \catcode`\|=12
   5269   \catcode`\<=12
   5270   \catcode`\>=12
   5271   \catcode`\+=12
   5272   \catcode`\{=12
   5273   \catcode`\}=12
   5274   \catcode`\@=12
   5275   \catcode`\^^M=12
   5276   \usembodybackslash}
   5277 
   5278 \def\macroargctxt{%
   5279   \catcode`\~=12
   5280   \catcode`\^=12
   5281   \catcode`\_=12
   5282   \catcode`\|=12
   5283   \catcode`\<=12
   5284   \catcode`\>=12
   5285   \catcode`\+=12
   5286   \catcode`\@=12
   5287   \catcode`\\=12}
   5288 
   5289 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
   5290 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
   5291 % where N is the macro parameter number.
   5292 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
   5293 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
   5294 
   5295 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
   5296  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
   5297  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
   5298 }
   5299 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
   5300 
   5301 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
   5302 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
   5303 
   5304 \def\macroxxx#1{%
   5305   \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
   5306   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
   5307      \paramno=0%
   5308   \else
   5309      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
   5310   \fi
   5311   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
   5312      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
   5313   \else
   5314      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
   5315      \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
   5316      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
   5317      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
   5318      % Add the macroname to \macrolist
   5319      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
   5320      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
   5321        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
   5322   \fi
   5323   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
   5324   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
   5325   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
   5326   \fi}
   5327 
   5328 \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
   5329 \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
   5330   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
   5331     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
   5332     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
   5333     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
   5334     \begingroup
   5335       \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
   5336       \def\do##1{%
   5337         \def\tempb{##1}%
   5338         \ifx\tempa\tempb
   5339           % remove this
   5340         \else
   5341           \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
   5342           \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
   5343         \fi}%
   5344       \def\newmacrolist{}%
   5345       % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
   5346       \macrolist
   5347       \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
   5348     \endgroup
   5349   \else
   5350     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
   5351   \fi
   5352 }
   5353 
   5354 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
   5355 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
   5356 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
   5357 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
   5358 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
   5359 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
   5360 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
   5361 
   5362 % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
   5363 % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
   5364 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
   5365 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
   5366 
   5367 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
   5368 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
   5369 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
   5370 % it to # just before using the token list produced.
   5371 %
   5372 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
   5373 % the macro is used.
   5374 
   5375 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
   5376         \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
   5377 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
   5378   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
   5379   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
   5380     \advance\paramno by 1%
   5381     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
   5382         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
   5383     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
   5384   \fi\next}
   5385 
   5386 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
   5387 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
   5388 
   5389 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
   5390 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
   5391 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
   5392 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
   5393 
   5394 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
   5395 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
   5396 % Much magic with \expandafter here.
   5397 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
   5398 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
   5399 \def\defmacro{%
   5400   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
   5401   \ifrecursive
   5402     \ifcase\paramno
   5403     % 0
   5404       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
   5405         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
   5406     \or % 1
   5407       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
   5408          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
   5409          \noexpand\braceorline
   5410          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
   5411       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
   5412          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
   5413     \else % many
   5414       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
   5415          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
   5416          \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
   5417       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
   5418           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
   5419       \expandafter\expandafter
   5420       \expandafter\xdef
   5421       \expandafter\expandafter
   5422         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
   5423           \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
   5424     \fi
   5425   \else
   5426     \ifcase\paramno
   5427     % 0
   5428       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
   5429         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
   5430         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
   5431     \or % 1
   5432       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
   5433          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
   5434          \noexpand\braceorline
   5435          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
   5436       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
   5437         \egroup
   5438         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
   5439         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
   5440     \else % many
   5441       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
   5442          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
   5443          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
   5444       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
   5445           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
   5446       \expandafter\expandafter
   5447       \expandafter\xdef
   5448       \expandafter\expandafter
   5449       \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
   5450       \paramlist{%
   5451           \egroup
   5452           \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
   5453           \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
   5454     \fi
   5455   \fi}
   5456 
   5457 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
   5458 
   5459 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
   5460 % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
   5461 % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
   5462 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
   5463 \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
   5464 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
   5465   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
   5466     \expandafter\parsearg
   5467   \fi \next}
   5468 
   5469 % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
   5470 % expanded by \write.
   5471 \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
   5472   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
   5473 
   5474 
   5475 % @alias.
   5476 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
   5477 % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
   5478 \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
   5479 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
   5480 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
   5481 \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
   5482            \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
   5483 \expandafter\endgroup\next}
   5484 
   5485 
   5486 \message{cross references,}
   5487 % @xref etc.
   5488 
   5489 \newwrite\auxfile
   5490 
   5491 \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
   5492 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
   5493 
   5494 % @inforef is relatively simple.
   5495 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
   5496 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
   5497   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
   5498 
   5499 % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
   5500 \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
   5501 \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
   5502 \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
   5503 \let\nwnode=\node
   5504 \let\lastnode=\relax
   5505 
   5506 % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
   5507 \def\donoderef{%
   5508   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
   5509     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
   5510       {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
   5511     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
   5512   \fi
   5513 }
   5514 \def\unnumbnoderef{%
   5515   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
   5516     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
   5517     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
   5518   \fi
   5519 }
   5520 \def\appendixnoderef{%
   5521   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
   5522     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
   5523       {Yappendixletterandtype}%
   5524     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
   5525   \fi
   5526 }
   5527 
   5528 
   5529 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
   5530 %
   5531 \newcount\savesfregister
   5532 \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
   5533 \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
   5534 \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
   5535 
   5536 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
   5537 % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
   5538 % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
   5539 % aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
   5540 % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
   5541 %
   5542 \def\setref#1#2{{%
   5543   \indexdummies
   5544   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
   5545   \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
   5546   \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
   5547   \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
   5548 }}
   5549 
   5550 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
   5551 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
   5552 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
   5553 % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
   5554 %
   5555 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
   5556 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
   5557 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
   5558 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
   5559   \unsepspaces
   5560   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
   5561   \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
   5562   \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
   5563   \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
   5564   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
   5565     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
   5566     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
   5567       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
   5568       \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
   5569     \else
   5570       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
   5571       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
   5572       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
   5573         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
   5574         \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
   5575       \else
   5576         \ifhavexrefs
   5577           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
   5578           \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
   5579         \else
   5580           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
   5581           \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
   5582         \fi%
   5583       \fi
   5584     \fi
   5585   \fi
   5586   %
   5587   % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
   5588   % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
   5589   % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
   5590   % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
   5591   % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
   5592   % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
   5593   \ifpdf
   5594     \leavevmode
   5595     \getfilename{#4}%
   5596     {\normalturnoffactive
   5597      \ifnum\filenamelength>0
   5598        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
   5599          goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
   5600      \else
   5601        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
   5602          goto name{#1}%
   5603      \fi
   5604     }%
   5605     \linkcolor
   5606   \fi
   5607   %
   5608   \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
   5609     \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
   5610   \else
   5611     % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
   5612     % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
   5613     % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
   5614     % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
   5615     % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
   5616     {\normalturnoffactive
   5617      % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
   5618      % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
   5619      \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
   5620      \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
   5621     }%
   5622     % [mynode],
   5623     [\printednodename],\space
   5624     % page 3
   5625     \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
   5626   \fi
   5627   \endlink
   5628 \endgroup}
   5629 
   5630 % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
   5631 
   5632 % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
   5633 % and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
   5634 \def\dosetq#1#2{%
   5635   {\let\folio=0%
   5636    \normalturnoffactive
   5637    \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
   5638    \iflinks
   5639      \next
   5640    \fi
   5641   }%
   5642 }
   5643 
   5644 % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
   5645 % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
   5646 % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
   5647 
   5648 \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
   5649 
   5650 % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
   5651 
   5652 \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
   5653 
   5654 \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
   5655 
   5656 \def\Ynothing{}
   5657 
   5658 \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
   5659 \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
   5660 \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
   5661 \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
   5662 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
   5663 \else %
   5664 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
   5665 \fi \fi \fi }
   5666 
   5667 \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
   5668 \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
   5669 \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
   5670 \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
   5671 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
   5672 \else %
   5673 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
   5674 \fi \fi \fi }
   5675 
   5676 \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
   5677 
   5678 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
   5679 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
   5680 %
   5681 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
   5682   \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
   5683 \else
   5684   \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
   5685 \fi
   5686 
   5687 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
   5688 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
   5689 
   5690 \def\refx#1#2{%
   5691   \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
   5692     % If not defined, say something at least.
   5693     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
   5694     \iflinks
   5695       \ifhavexrefs
   5696         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
   5697       \else
   5698         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
   5699           \global\warnedxrefstrue
   5700           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
   5701         \fi
   5702       \fi
   5703     \fi
   5704   \else
   5705     % It's defined, so just use it.
   5706     \csname X#1\endcsname
   5707   \fi
   5708   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
   5709 }
   5710 
   5711 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
   5712 %
   5713 \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
   5714   % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
   5715   \catcode`\\ = 0
   5716   \afterassignment\endgroup
   5717   \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
   5718 }
   5719 
   5720 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
   5721 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
   5722   \catcode`\^^@=\other
   5723   \catcode`\^^A=\other
   5724   \catcode`\^^B=\other
   5725   \catcode`\^^C=\other
   5726   \catcode`\^^D=\other
   5727   \catcode`\^^E=\other
   5728   \catcode`\^^F=\other
   5729   \catcode`\^^G=\other
   5730   \catcode`\^^H=\other
   5731   \catcode`\^^K=\other
   5732   \catcode`\^^L=\other
   5733   \catcode`\^^N=\other
   5734   \catcode`\^^P=\other
   5735   \catcode`\^^Q=\other
   5736   \catcode`\^^R=\other
   5737   \catcode`\^^S=\other
   5738   \catcode`\^^T=\other
   5739   \catcode`\^^U=\other
   5740   \catcode`\^^V=\other
   5741   \catcode`\^^W=\other
   5742   \catcode`\^^X=\other
   5743   \catcode`\^^Z=\other
   5744   \catcode`\^^[=\other
   5745   \catcode`\^^\=\other
   5746   \catcode`\^^]=\other
   5747   \catcode`\^^^=\other
   5748   \catcode`\^^_=\other
   5749   \catcode`\@=\other
   5750   \catcode`\^=\other
   5751   % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
   5752   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
   5753   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
   5754   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
   5755   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
   5756   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
   5757   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
   5758   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
   5759   %
   5760   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
   5761   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
   5762   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
   5763   %
   5764   \catcode`\~=\other
   5765   \catcode`\[=\other
   5766   \catcode`\]=\other
   5767   \catcode`\"=\other
   5768   \catcode`\_=\other
   5769   \catcode`\|=\other
   5770   \catcode`\<=\other
   5771   \catcode`\>=\other
   5772   \catcode`\$=\other
   5773   \catcode`\#=\other
   5774   \catcode`\&=\other
   5775   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
   5776   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
   5777   {%
   5778     \count 1=128
   5779     \def\loop{%
   5780       \catcode\count 1=\other
   5781       \advance\count 1 by 1
   5782       \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
   5783     }%
   5784   }%
   5785   % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
   5786   % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
   5787   % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
   5788   % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
   5789   % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
   5790   % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
   5791   \catcode`\{=1
   5792   \catcode`\}=2
   5793   \catcode`\%=\other
   5794   \catcode`\'=0
   5795   \catcode`\\=\other
   5796   %
   5797   \openin 1 \jobname.aux
   5798   \ifeof 1 \else
   5799     \closein 1
   5800     \input \jobname.aux
   5801     \global\havexrefstrue
   5802     \global\warnedobstrue
   5803   \fi
   5804   % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
   5805   \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
   5806 \endgroup}
   5807 
   5808 
   5809 % Footnotes.
   5810 
   5811 \newcount \footnoteno
   5812 
   5813 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
   5814 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
   5815 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
   5816 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
   5817 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
   5818 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
   5819 
   5820 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
   5821 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
   5822 
   5823 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
   5824 
   5825 {\catcode `\@=11
   5826 %
   5827 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
   5828 \gdef\footnote{%
   5829   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
   5830   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
   5831   %
   5832   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
   5833   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
   5834   \let\@sf\empty
   5835   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
   5836   %
   5837   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
   5838   \unskip
   5839   \thisfootno\@sf
   5840   \footnotezzz
   5841 }%
   5842 
   5843 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
   5844 % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
   5845 %
   5846 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
   5847 % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
   5848 % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
   5849 %
   5850 \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
   5851   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
   5852   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
   5853   % So reset some parameters.
   5854   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
   5855   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
   5856   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
   5857   \floatingpenalty\@MM
   5858   \leftskip\z@skip
   5859   \rightskip\z@skip
   5860   \spaceskip\z@skip
   5861   \xspaceskip\z@skip
   5862   \parindent\defaultparindent
   5863   %
   5864   \smallfonts \rm
   5865   %
   5866   % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
   5867   % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
   5868   % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
   5869   % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
   5870   \let\noindent = \relax
   5871   %
   5872   % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
   5873   % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
   5874   \everypar = {\hang}%
   5875   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
   5876   %
   5877   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
   5878   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
   5879   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
   5880   \footstrut
   5881   \futurelet\next\fo@t
   5882 }
   5883 \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
   5884   \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
   5885 \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
   5886 \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
   5887 \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
   5888 
   5889 }%end \catcode `\@=11
   5890 
   5891 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
   5892 % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
   5893 % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
   5894 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
   5895 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
   5896 %
   5897 \def\|{%
   5898   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
   5899   \leavevmode
   5900   %
   5901   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
   5902   \vadjust{%
   5903     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
   5904     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
   5905     \vskip-\baselineskip
   5906     %
   5907     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
   5908     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
   5909     \llap{%
   5910       %
   5911       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
   5912       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
   5913       %
   5914       % This is the space between the bar and the text.
   5915       \hskip 12pt
   5916     }%
   5917   }%
   5918 }
   5919 
   5920 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
   5921 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
   5922 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
   5923 %
   5924 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
   5925 
   5926 % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
   5927 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
   5928 %
   5929 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
   5930 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
   5931 % undone and the next image would fail.
   5932 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
   5933 \ifeof 1 \else
   5934   \closein 1
   5935   % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
   5936   % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
   5937   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
   5938   \input epsf.tex
   5939 \fi
   5940 %
   5941 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
   5942 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
   5943 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
   5944   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
   5945   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
   5946 %
   5947 \def\image#1{%
   5948   \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
   5949     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
   5950       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
   5951       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
   5952       \global\warnednoepsftrue
   5953     \fi
   5954   \else
   5955     \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
   5956   \fi
   5957 }
   5958 %
   5959 % Arguments to @image:
   5960 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
   5961 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
   5962 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
   5963 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
   5964 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
   5965 \newif\ifimagevmode
   5966 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
   5967   \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
   5968   \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
   5969   % If the image is by itself, center it.
   5970   \ifvmode
   5971     \imagevmodetrue
   5972     \nobreak\bigskip
   5973     % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
   5974     % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
   5975     % above and below. 
   5976     \nobreak\vskip\parskip
   5977     \nobreak
   5978     \line\bgroup\hss
   5979   \fi
   5980   %
   5981   % Output the image.
   5982   \ifpdf
   5983     \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
   5984   \else
   5985     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
   5986     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
   5987     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
   5988     \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
   5989   \fi
   5990   %
   5991   \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
   5992 \endgroup}
   5993 
   5994 
   5995 \message{localization,}
   5996 % and i18n.
   5997 
   5998 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
   5999 % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
   6000 % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
   6001 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
   6002 %
   6003 \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
   6004 \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
   6005   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
   6006   % Read the file if it exists.
   6007   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
   6008   \ifeof1
   6009     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
   6010     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
   6011     \let\temp = \relax
   6012   \else
   6013     \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
   6014   \fi
   6015   \temp
   6016   \endgroup
   6017 }
   6018 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
   6019 is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
   6020 should work if nowhere else does.}
   6021 
   6022 
   6023 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
   6024 % likely, but for now just recognize it.
   6025 \let\documentencoding = \comment
   6026 
   6027 
   6028 % Page size parameters.
   6029 %
   6030 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
   6031 
   6032 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
   6033 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
   6034 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
   6035 
   6036 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
   6037 \vbadness = 10000
   6038 
   6039 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
   6040 \hbadness = 2000
   6041 
   6042 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
   6043 \widowpenalty=10000
   6044 \clubpenalty=10000
   6045 
   6046 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
   6047 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
   6048 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
   6049 % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
   6050 %
   6051 \def\setemergencystretch{%
   6052   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
   6053     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
   6054     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
   6055   \else
   6056     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
   6057   \fi
   6058 }
   6059 
   6060 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
   6061 % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  We also call
   6062 % \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
   6063 % The caller should also set \parskip.
   6064 %
   6065 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
   6066   \voffset = #3\relax
   6067   \topskip = #6\relax
   6068   \splittopskip = \topskip
   6069   %
   6070   \vsize = #1\relax
   6071   \advance\vsize by \topskip
   6072   \outervsize = \vsize
   6073   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
   6074   \pageheight = \vsize
   6075   %
   6076   \hsize = #2\relax
   6077   \outerhsize = \hsize
   6078   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
   6079   \pagewidth = \hsize
   6080   %
   6081   \normaloffset = #4\relax
   6082   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
   6083   %
   6084   \setleading{\textleading}
   6085   %
   6086   \parindent = \defaultparindent
   6087   \setemergencystretch
   6088 }
   6089 
   6090 % Use `small' versions.
   6091 % 
   6092 \def\smallenvironments{%
   6093   \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
   6094   \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
   6095   \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
   6096   \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
   6097 }
   6098 
   6099 % @letterpaper (the default).
   6100 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
   6101   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
   6102   \textleading = 13.2pt
   6103   %
   6104   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
   6105   \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
   6106 }}
   6107 
   6108 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
   6109 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
   6110   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
   6111   \textleading = 12pt
   6112   %
   6113   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
   6114   %
   6115   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
   6116   \tolerance = 700
   6117   \hfuzz = 1pt
   6118   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
   6119   \deftypemargin = 0pt
   6120   \defbodyindent = .5cm
   6121   \smallenvironments
   6122 }}
   6123 
   6124 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
   6125 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
   6126   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
   6127   \textleading = 12pt
   6128   %
   6129   \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
   6130   %
   6131   \tolerance = 700
   6132   \hfuzz = 1pt
   6133 }}
   6134 
   6135 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
   6136 % From romildo (a] urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
   6137 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
   6138 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
   6139   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
   6140   \textleading = 12.5pt
   6141   %
   6142   \internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
   6143   %
   6144   \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
   6145   \tolerance = 800
   6146   \hfuzz = 1.2pt
   6147   \contentsrightmargin = 0mm
   6148   \deftypemargin = 0pt
   6149   \defbodyindent = 2mm
   6150   \tableindent = 12mm
   6151   %
   6152   \smallenvironments
   6153 }}
   6154 
   6155 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
   6156 % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
   6157 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
   6158   \textleading = 13.6pt
   6159   %
   6160   \afourpaper
   6161   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
   6162   %
   6163   % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
   6164   % although this does not entirely make sense.
   6165   \globaldefs = 0
   6166 }}
   6167 
   6168 % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
   6169 \def\afourwide{%
   6170   \afourpaper
   6171   \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
   6172 }
   6173 
   6174 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
   6175 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
   6176 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
   6177 %
   6178 \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
   6179 \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
   6180 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
   6181   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
   6182   \globaldefs = 1
   6183   %
   6184   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
   6185   \setleading{\textleading}%
   6186   %
   6187   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
   6188 }}
   6189 
   6190 % Set default to letter.
   6191 %
   6192 \letterpaper
   6193 
   6194 
   6195 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
   6196 
   6197 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
   6198 \catcode`\"=\other
   6199 \catcode`\~=\other
   6200 \catcode`\^=\other
   6201 \catcode`\_=\other
   6202 \catcode`\|=\other
   6203 \catcode`\<=\other
   6204 \catcode`\>=\other
   6205 \catcode`\+=\other
   6206 \catcode`\$=\other
   6207 \def\normaldoublequote{"}
   6208 \def\normaltilde{~}
   6209 \def\normalcaret{^}
   6210 \def\normalunderscore{_}
   6211 \def\normalverticalbar{|}
   6212 \def\normalless{<}
   6213 \def\normalgreater{>}
   6214 \def\normalplus{+}
   6215 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
   6216 
   6217 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
   6218 % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
   6219 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
   6220 %
   6221 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
   6222 % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
   6223 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
   6224 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
   6225 %
   6226 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
   6227 
   6228 % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
   6229 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
   6230 % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
   6231 % this is not a problem.
   6232 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
   6233 
   6234 % Turn off all special characters except @
   6235 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
   6236 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
   6237 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
   6238 
   6239 \catcode`\"=\active
   6240 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
   6241 \let"=\activedoublequote
   6242 \catcode`\~=\active
   6243 \def~{{\tt\char126}}
   6244 \chardef\hat=`\^
   6245 \catcode`\^=\active
   6246 \def^{{\tt \hat}}
   6247 
   6248 \catcode`\_=\active
   6249 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
   6250 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
   6251 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
   6252 
   6253 \catcode`\|=\active
   6254 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
   6255 \chardef \less=`\<
   6256 \catcode`\<=\active
   6257 \def<{{\tt \less}}
   6258 \chardef \gtr=`\>
   6259 \catcode`\>=\active
   6260 \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
   6261 \catcode`\+=\active
   6262 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
   6263 \catcode`\$=\active
   6264 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
   6265 %\catcode 27=\active
   6266 %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
   6267 
   6268 % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
   6269 {\catcode`\==\active
   6270 \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
   6271 
   6272 \catcode`+=\active
   6273 \catcode`\_=\active
   6274 
   6275 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
   6276 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
   6277 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
   6278 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
   6279 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
   6280 
   6281 \catcode`\@=0
   6282 
   6283 % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
   6284 \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
   6285 %{\catcode`\\=\other
   6286 %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
   6287 
   6288 % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
   6289 {\catcode`\\=\active
   6290 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
   6291 
   6292 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
   6293 \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
   6294 
   6295 % \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
   6296 \catcode`\\=\active
   6297 
   6298 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
   6299 % even after parsing them.
   6300 @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
   6301 @let\=@realbackslash
   6302 @let~=@normaltilde
   6303 @let^=@normalcaret
   6304 @let_=@normalunderscore
   6305 @let|=@normalverticalbar
   6306 @let<=@normalless
   6307 @let>=@normalgreater
   6308 @let+=@normalplus
   6309 @let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
   6310 
   6311 @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
   6312 @let\=@normalbackslash
   6313 @let~=@normaltilde
   6314 @let^=@normalcaret
   6315 @let_=@normalunderscore
   6316 @let|=@normalverticalbar
   6317 @let<=@normalless
   6318 @let>=@normalgreater
   6319 @let+=@normalplus
   6320 @let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
   6321 
   6322 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
   6323 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
   6324 @otherifyactive
   6325 
   6326 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
   6327 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
   6328 % a backslash.
   6329 %
   6330 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
   6331 @global@let\ = @eatinput
   6332 
   6333 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
   6334 % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
   6335 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
   6336 % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
   6337 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
   6338 %
   6339 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
   6340   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
   6341   @catcode`+=@active
   6342   @catcode`@_=@active
   6343 }
   6344 
   6345 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
   6346 @escapechar = `@@
   6347 
   6348 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  
   6349 @catcode`@& = @other
   6350 @catcode`@# = @other
   6351 @catcode`@% = @other
   6352 
   6353 @c Set initial fonts.
   6354 @textfonts
   6355 @rm
   6356 
   6357 
   6358 @c Local variables:
   6359 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
   6360 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
   6361 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
   6362 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
   6363 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
   6364 @c End:
   6365